Home
        2013 SRT Viper Owner`s Manual
         Contents
1.                         296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    FLUIDS  LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS                   Engine   Component Fluid  Lubricant  or Genuine Part   Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR   Antifreeze Coolant  10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT  Organic Additive  Technology     Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W 40 or  equivalent engine oil    Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR   Engine Oil Filters    Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR   Spark Plugs  see  your authorized dealer    Fuel Selection We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane  Only or Higher          EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297  Chassis                      Component Fluid  Lubricant  or Genuine Part   Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR   ATF 4   Automatic  Transmission Fluid    Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF XJ SAE 75W 140  Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant    Brake Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR   Brake and Clutch  Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle    Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR   Power Steering Fluid    4  MOPAR   or ATF 4   Automatic Transmission  Fluid                 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES    CONTENTS    B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES              300 Required Maintenance Intervals             301                   300 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses    MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES At Each Stop For Fuel   The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a  manual m
2.                 308 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses          78 000 Miles  130 000 km  or 84 000 Miles  140 000 km  or 84 Months Maintenance Service  78 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule  1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   H Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires   filter   1 Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    J Rotate tires  LI Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    1 Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary        H Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary           Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code             Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center             NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 309       90 000 Miles  150 000 km  or 96 000 Miles  160 000 km  or 96 Months Maintenance Service  90 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   T Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires    filter  Q1 Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    T Rotate tires  H Replace the spark plugs   T Replace the engine air cleaner filter  H Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary   11 Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if 4 Inspect the exhaust system    necessary   T Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or le
3.                198  Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC        104  Emergency Brake societi iea Ka aiaei i 191  Emergency  In Case of   Freeing Vehicle When Stuck                  249   Hazard Warning Flasher                    234   Jump Starting   i   eux es ak buck e RR re s 245   Overheating esit scene et petens eet e as 234    TOWNS socie d acd doe a eene dace OE 250  Emission Control System Maintenance            254  Enpines  ssi e EE ea SR tina Red 253   Air Cleanief  it EE REED AE EER ae s 259   Break In Recommendations                   67   Checking Oil Level   4i ker e Ren 257   Compartment   225 6444 mia ho EER EERS RE hen 253   Coolant  Antifreeze          0    eee eee 269   Coole aipe ae ish Seite RAS Ce ns 269   Exhaust Gas Caution corseira orreri eias 32   Fails to Start    eee 178   Flooded  Starting essre rsessres rator  178   Fuel Requirements ss sus scd dea raa aoe aua i 225   GE tea piaia ER ONS 257   Oil Change Interval         osse ee see ee ee 258   Oil Filler Capi sss DE Ee ER pe BREER N 258   Oil Selection ai Sea a Ee e ER EE er RR nes 258   Overheating   i sd Res   369 bee E ER Ee 234  Engine Oil VISCOSIy es cead enere al aed 258       332 INDEX ME    Enhanced Accident Response Feature             56  Ethanol  3 5 dre adn a ae a ee 226  Event Data Recorder            000  se niria 59  Exhaust Gas Caution          0  0 0000 eee eae 32  Exhaust Systemi ees EER Serb EN ER ed 68  Exterior Lighting   52e eee t an 88  Exterior Lights  ss cic tidi
4.              1 INTRODUCTION  4 as 675 5 se Salas   RAE RI Re CPG are Roe RU A E Ee uL a   2  THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE            es see es se  3   UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE             eee  4   UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL              es se ee ss ee es se  5   STARTING AND OPERATING        ss sesse ese ese ees ee es ss ss ss ss ee e fs  6  WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES         ss ss ss ss ss se see ee ee hh ss  7  MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  s escarra se ee ee ee ee ss es se ee ee ee  8   MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES         os ss ss sesse sesse se see ee ee se ss ss ss  9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE         oo ss see ss ee ss se ee ss ee es se  Em INDEX  Eie Ese ES ae ie wh ee pu Roa E Ro VOIR Ed ped CUPIS UE ERR RC os                INTRODUCTION       CONTENTS  B INTRODUCTION        SS SeSe Se 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER          6  ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL                4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS      7    E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS                6    4 INTRODUCTION Sas    INTRODUCTION    Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group  LLC vehicle  Be assured that it represents precision  workmanship  distinctive styling  and high guality   all  essentials that are traditional to our vehicles     This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis   tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint  you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle   It is supplemented by Warranty Information  and var
5.           6  270   Capacities  cce bee ee Ke ee 295   Disposalz   az EEDEN RE EE dU Rer EE Senge tes 273  Anti Lock Brake System  ABS          ee ee ee 195  Anti Lock Warning Light             ee ee ee 137  Anti Theft Security Alarm  Theft Alarm            18  Appearance Care       eee ee 279  Auto Down Power Windows            sss  29  Automatic Door Locks        ee ee ee Ee ee ee 27  Automatic Headlights    nanana aaa 89  Auto  Unlock  Doors    ra eae ere aes RR E 27  Auto Up Power Windows           lees 29  Auxiliary Electrical Outlet  Power Outlet           115  Auxiliary Power Outlet           ee ee ee ee 115  Dattetyza es RE Rae d rte means 260   Emergency Starting         llle 245    Ed INDEX 329    Jump Starting ii sei REEN eoe EE DR EE eens 245  Keyless Transmitter Replacement  RKE           23  LOCAHOMN 24 003 eu dore RE Race aed eas 260  Saving Feature  Protection                   262  storing Vehicle    ice mice HERE RENE D 262  Belts  Seat viera dor REOR dea Se a ea 33  Body Mechanism Lubrication                  264  B Pilla Location       llle 209  Brake Control System  Electronic                197  Brake  Parking  i0 EE ae Soo ee ERE 191  BrakeSystem        ce eee 193  Anti Lock  ABS      0    eee 193  Fluid Check so ic 30 eee eR x Capos RR 275  Master Cylinder      0 2    0 0 00 cee 275  Warning Light s ie is nee ERNS SR esr ta 128  Break In Recommendations  New Vehicle          67  Brightness  Interior Lights                   6  92  Bulb Replacement  ss 2
6.        ees ee irr eanes  176  Steering  Column Controls       EE EE eese  90  POWER s suce s cae ded pendunt n ee eed Dn eg 189  Tilt Column 2 ng ca cee e nk s 97  Steering Wheel Audio Controls                 164  Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls     164  DOPAC uses N meas aon eed dep ROC m es 290  Storage  Vehicle           lees 171  Stuck  Freeing   ug icu peor pe ede 249  Supplemental Restraint System   Airbag           43    340 INDEX MEE    Tachometer  ii 40s e d RR ae kk Pew 130  Theft Alarm  Security Alarm                    18  Theft System  Security Alarm                   18  Tilt Steering Column  see ad nep e ed 97  Time Delay  Headlight            oo ee es se ees se ee 89  Tire and Loading Information Placard            209  TIRER 222333644 SE de poo ne bk he 235  Tire Markings  i e tees ER ER ee eas 202  de ER EE EE TE A 70  Aging  Life of Tires   sre ee Ee Ee ee ee 219  Air Pressure  2 005 04 644 604485 bh bod ES d 214  Chais  6 04 EER BEE e Ed Ge G ka de waders a 221  General Information               0 00005 214  High Speed  3 2 ats dake ake ag a og nae 217  Inflation Pressures    6 0 0    l l 215  Life of Tires   ca ees 4 EER aka ER SERE DR Ee 219  Load Capacity  lt tc anak RR RR tae ee hern 209  Pressure Monitor System  TPMS               223    Pressure Warning Light    Quality Grading   ce 6444294 bane seas awn 325  Radial se eS DER tte anie ARIS PE 217  Replacement        i224 be site nines 219  ROtatiOn zx acd ER eA ERE Rhe E RE RS 221  Safe
7.      202 STARTING AND OPERATING    WARNING  TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION    Tire Markings       In the ESC    Full Off    mode  the engine torque  reduction and stability features are disabled  There   fore  the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is    unavailable  In an emergency evasive maneuver  the  ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining  stability   ESC Off  mode is intended for off highway  or off road use only        054903773    1     U S  DOT Safety Standards 4     Maximum Load    Code  TIN   2     Size Designation 5     Maximum Pressure  3     Service Description 6     Treadwear  Traction and    Temperature Grades       NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 203  NOTE     e    e     e     P  Passenger    Metric tire sizing is based on U S   design standards  P Metric tires have the letter  P   molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa   tion  Example  P215 65R15 95H     European Metric tire sizing is based on European  design standards  Tires designed to this standard have  the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with  the section width  The letter  P  is absent from this tire  size designation  Example  215 65R15 96H     LT  Light Truck    Metric tire sizing is based on U S   design standards  The size designation for LI Metric  tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the  letters  LT  that are molded into the sidewall preced   ing the size designation  Example  LT235 85R16       Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo  
8.     or go to http   www safercargov  or write to   Administrator  NHTSA  1200 New Jersey Avenue  SE   West Building  Washington  D C  20590  You can also obtain  other information about motor vehicle safety from  http    www safercar gov     In Canada    If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect  you  should contact the Customer Service Department imme   diately  Canadian customers who wish to report a safety    defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans   port Canada  Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and  Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http    www tc gc ca   roadsafety      PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS    To order the following manuals  you may use either the  website or the phone numbers listed below  Visa  Mas   tercard  American Express  and Discover orders are ac   cepted  If you prefer mailing your payment  please call  for an order form     NOTE  A street address is required when ordering  manuals  no PO  Boxes      Service Manuals    These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor   mation that students and professional technicians need in    324    diagnosing  troubleshooting  problem solving  maintain   ing  servicing  and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve   hicles  A complete working knowledge of the vehicle   system  and or components is written in straightforward  language with illustrations  diagrams  and charts     Diagnostic Procedure Manuals    Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams   charts and detailed illustratio
9.     them or under the arm       Never allow a child to lean forward toward the    instrument panel as a passenger Air Bag deployment  could cause severe injury or death to a child in this  position       Fora child from 1 to 12 years old  Move the passenger    seat as far back as possible  For a child from 20 to  60 Ibs  9 kg to 27 kg   Secure them in the appropriate  child safety seat or booster seat  If too large for a  booster seat  the child should wear the lap shoulder  belt properly     8  Read the instructions provided with your child re     straint to make sure that you are using it properly     9  Read the instructions provided with your child safety    seat or booster seat to make sure that you are using it  properly     10  All occupants should always wear their lap and    shoulder belts properly     11  Position the driver seat and passenger seat as far    away from the instrument panel as practical to allow  the Air Bags room to inflate  Note that the power  adjustable pedals allow for more driver s seat adjust   ment options  Refer to  Adjustable Pedals  in  Un   derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle  for de   tails        48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Air Bag System Components    Your vehicle may be eguipped with the following Air Bag    system components     e    e    e    e     e     Occupant Restraint Controller  ORC   Air Bag Warning Light   Steering Wheel and Column  Instrument Panel   Knee Impact Bols
10.    000  223 Monitor  Tire Pressure System                  223  Lubrication  Body   sesse N RE n m 264  Mopar Parts  ses esed ERR RR sea RR Ra ee 256   MIBE ETBE   4 ou ee EROR d DER des 226  Maintenance Free Battery         ees Es ee ee ee 260 Multi Function Control Lever         iese ese 90  Maintenance Procedures                 005  257  Maintenance Schedule                  004  300 New Vehicle Break In Period                0   67  Malfunction Indicator Light  Check Engine          132  Manual  Service    usi hice tea  eb Mon ea 323 Occupant Restraints          ee ee ee ee ee ee 33  Manual Transmission     ee ee ee EE EE EE ee ee 179 Octane Rating  Gasoline  Fuel                  225   Fluid Level Check              0 00002 277 Oil PAGING ss coe RR BE DR e ba 257   Lubricant Selection            20 00 0000  297 Capacity  ssid seat hes be eee Ie ae ees 295   Shitt Speeds in season gus 182 Change Interval i4 sioe Stee e RES 258  Methanol   s ga SEPIES pere HS m aH REA UR Ga 226 Checking  ers ET ET OE ne 257  MIETOIS  4 2 250 3o s e arae mede ace d ee a Me s 76 Dipstick si ss ss EER DE ER rs ema 257   Electric Remote    ics nme De a Re is 78 Disposal   coge tec as Xe eee RR RR OR Ones 259   ie EE eed ea AUR RE eee 77 Filter  AR EE EL 259    Reatview  ie 3e ree EE ri SR dederis OEE e 76 Filter Disposal  so sedora est rre dS nens 259    Ed INDEX 337    Materials Added to        iens aen EE eee 259   Recommendation        ee ee ee a ee ee eee 258   VISCOSHY Dnm 258  Oil Filte
11.    B  Jumper   33     20 Amp Yellow       Spare   34             B  Jumper   35     Jumper Black     Spare   36         10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run   37         15 Amp Blue Cluster  Mirror  Camera   38       20 Amp Yellow   Active Damping Suspension   39         10 Amp Red HVAC Module  In Car Temp   40         15 Amp Blue Radio   41 G8VA         Run Start   42 G8VA         Fuel Door                            288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M                                                       Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description   43AC         10 Amp Red SCCM    Forward   Fuse    43BE         10 Amp Red Corax    Rearward   Fuse    44BE         10 Amp Red IBS    Rearward   Fuse    45 m   10 Amp Red PCM  Powertrain Control Module  46     10 Amp Red ESP Module   47 s     10 Amp Red ORC Module   48         10 Amp Red SCCM   49         25 Amp Natural   Amplifier   50 HC Micro           Rad Fan   51 HC Micro           Rad Fan Relay SER PAR       NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289                                                 Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description   52 HC Micro           Starter Relay   53 HC Micro           EBL Relay   54 HC Relay           Rad Fan Relay High  55 HC Micro           Wiper ON OFF   56 HC Micro           Wiper LO HI   57 G8VA         Horn Relay   58 G8VA         A C Clutch Relay  59 HC Micro           HVAC Blower   60 HC Micro           Fuel Pump   61 G8VA         Run Relay  1   62 G8VA         Run Relay  2   63 HC Micro           A
12.    The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air  comes from the instrument panel outlets  floor outlets   demist outlets and defrost outlets  The Mode settings are  as follows   e Panel Mode  3 Air comes from the outlets in the instrument  panel  Each of these outlets can be individually  adjusted to direct the flow of air  The air vanes of  the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up  and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction   There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to  shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these  outlets     e Bi Level Mode  Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and  floor outlets  A slight amount of air is directed  through the defrost and side window demister  outlets     NOTE  BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con   ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and  warmer air from the floor outlets    e Floor Mode    Air comes from the floor outlets  A slight amount  of air is directed through the defrost and side  window demister outlets   e Mix Mode  Air comes from the floor  defrost and side window  demist outlets  This mode works best in cold or  snowy conditions      gt e       NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169    7  Blower Control    Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air  forced through the climate system  There are seven  blower speeds available  Adjusting the blower will cause  automatic mode to switch to manual operation  The  speeds can be sel
13.    have been damaged  bent retractor  torn webbing   etc    4  Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the    folded webbing        40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System   BeltAlert      BeltAlert  is a feature intended to remind the driver and  front passenger  if equipped with front passenger  BeltAlert    to fasten their seat belts  The feature is active  whenever the ignition is on  If the driver or front seat  passenger is unbelted  the Seat Belt Reminder Light will  turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are  fastened     The BeltAlert   warning sequence begins after the vehicle  speed is over 5 mph  8 km h   by blinking the Seat Belt  Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime   Once the sequence starts  it will continue for the entire  duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened   After the sequence completes  the Seat Belt Reminder  Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts  are fastened  The driver should instruct all other occu   pants to fasten their seat belts  If a front seat belt is    unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph   8 km h   BeltAlert   will provide both audio and visual  notification     The front passenger seat BeltAlert   is not active when  the front passenger seat is unoccupied  BeltAlert  may  be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the  front passenger seat or when the seat is fol
14.    rary emergency use only  Temporary high pressure  compact spare tires have the letter    T    or    S    molded  into the sidewall preceding the size designation  Ex   ample  T145 80D18 103M     High flotation tire sizing is based on U S  design  standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded  into the sidewall  Example  31x10 5 R15 LT     204 STARTING AND OPERATING Se  Tire Sizing Chart       EXAMPLE        Size Designation   P   Passenger car tire size based on U S  design standards   blank       Passenger car tire based on European design standards  LT   Light truck tire based on U S  design standards  T or S   Temporary spare tire  31   Overall diameter in inches  in   215   Section width in millimeters  mm   65   Aspect ratio in percent          Ratio of section height to section width of tire  10 5   Section width in inches  in   R   Construction code       R  means radial construction       D  means diagonal or bias construction  15   Rim diameter in inches  in                       Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 205       EXAMPLE        Service Description   95   Load Index      A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry  H   Speed Symbol      A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to  its load index under certain operating conditions      The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under  specified operating conditions  i e   tire pressure  vehicle loading  r
15.   030971470    NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83    WARNING  Power Seats    On models eguipped with power seats  the power seat    e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous    witch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the    Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of   floor   control which could cause a collision and serious Fa  injury or death    e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat    belts and while the vehicle is parked  Serious  injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted  seat belt       Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  chest  In a collision you could slide under the seat  belt  which could result in serious injury or death        030971329    Power Seat Switch    84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward    The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward   Push the seat switch forward or rearward  the seat will  move in the direction of the switch  Release the switch  when the desired position has been reached     Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down    The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down  Push  upward or push downward on the seat switch  the seat  will move in the direction of the switch  Release the  switch when the desired position is reached     Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward    The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward   Push the power seat recliner
16.   Ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281    WARNING     Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes     Interior Care    Use MOPAR   Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and  carpeting     Use MOPAR   Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery     MOPAR   Total Clean is specifically recommended for  leather upholstery     Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular  cleaning with a damp soft cloth  Small particles of dirt  can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery  and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth   Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth  and MOPARQ Total Clean  Care should be taken to avoid  soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid  Please  do not use polishes  oils  cleaning fluids  solvents  deter   gents  or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather  upholstery  Application of a leather conditioner is not  required to maintain the original condition     Many are potentially flammable  and if used in  closed areas they may cause respiratory harm        Leather or Vinyl Seat Trim Care and Cleaning    Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a  damp soft cloth  Small particles of dirt can act as an  abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be  removed immediately with a damp cloth  Stubborn soils  can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR    Total Clean or equivalent  Care should be taken to avoid  soaking the leather with any liquid  Please do not use  polishes  oils  cleaning flu
17.   Gasoline  Fuel        0 20 0    0 000  eee 225  Gasoline  Reformulated               0 000 4 225  Gauges  RE EE Ae ag ed HS bade ages 130  Speedometer sek riss gy exa alee pe DA 127  Tachormeters soa ai he gek a eee ace we 130  General Information            0 0000 cee eee 17  Glass Cleaning crosda aaau eee 282  Ground Clearance    6    SS ees 232    Hazard  Driving Through Flowing  Rising  or Shallow  Standing Water sas d ed re BEE EER ER ts 187  Hazard Warning Flasher          ees es ss ee ee 234  Headlights  Automate is Ses cd  s Ex dur ek dU ed 89  Delay    2 ER E ER EE EER tind 89  High Beam Low Beam Select Switch            91  Lights On Reminder        oe EE EE Ee ee ee 90  On With Wipers    0 0 0 0    EE EE eee eee 89  Passings  od chanted omnes bees pete eh tows 92  eie igo em pa Rok Op make wie Yap 88  Time Delay ssn EES eae ba n CERRO ED 89  High Beam Low Beam Select  Dimmer  Switch       91  elk de MR EE eee giana ese ea RE    HomeLink    Garage Door Opener   Hood Release  rsss Sa oh eS ed RR REX E Rs  Hydraulic Clutch Fluid                  00 0        334 INDEX ees     laminated Entity  ice ne e res 20  Immobilizer  Sentry Key       ees Ee es ee 15  Infant Restraint s  ceset entie epe ERR n Obed 60  Inside Rearview Mirror                 00004 76  Instrument Cluster    ick rper eels ESR a 127  Instrument Panel and Controls                 125  Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning                282  Interior Appearance Care    1 2 2 2    0 002005  281  Interior Figh
18.   In  some collisions  Air Bags won t deploy at all   Always wear your seat belts even though you have    Air Bags      Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument  panel during Air Bag deployment could cause  serious injury  Air Bags need room to inflate  Sit  back  extending your arms comfortably to reach the  steering wheel or instrument panel     The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an  impact that requires air bag deployment  This low output  is used in less severe collisions  A higher energy output is  used for more severe collisions        The Air Bags have a multistage inflator design  This  allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that  are based on several factors  including collision severity  and occupant size     While the seat belts are designed to protect the driver and  passenger in many types of collisions  the Air Bags will  deploy in certain frontal collisions depending on several  factors  including the severity and type of collision   However  even in collisions where the Air Bags deploy   all occupants need the seat belts to keep them in the right  position for the Air Bags to protect properly        46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN  NOTE     e    The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may not  deploy if the Occupant Classification System  refer to     Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls     deter   mines the seat is empty or is occupied by someone that  is classified i
19.   causing serious personal injury  If the engine is flooded  it may start to run  but not have    enough power to continue running when the ENGINE   Continued  START button is released  If this occurs  continue crank   ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed  all the way to the floor  Release the accelerator pedal and  the ENGINE START button once the engine is running  smoothly        Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 179    If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15  second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal  held to the floor  the    Normal Starting    procedure should  be repeated     After Starting    The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will  decrease as the engine warms up     MANUAL TRANSMISSION    NOTE  The parking brake should be engaged and the  shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the  vehicle  especially when parked on an incline     Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual  disc clutch  The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the  floor during each shift  As you release the clutch pedal   lightly press the accelerator pedal     CAUTION       Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch  pedal  or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the  clutch pedal partially engaged  as this will cause  abnormal wear on the clutch    e Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor    may cause increased shift efforts  and may result in  damage to the clutch and transmission   e Do not rest you
20.   height allowed by their convertible child seat     WARNING     Rearward facing infant restraints must never be se   cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a    passenger Air Bag  In a collision  a passenger Air Bag  may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants  riding in rearward facing infant restraints           62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    Older Children and Child Restraints    Children who are two years old or who have outgrown  their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward   facing in the vehicle  Forward facing child seats and  convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc   tion are for children who are over two years old or who  have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of  their rear facing convertible child seat  Children should  remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for  as long as possible  up to the highest weight or height  allowed by the child seat     All children whose weight or height is above the  forward facing limit for the child seat should use a  belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle   s seat belts  fit properly  If the child cannot sit with knees bent over  the vehicle   s seat cushion while the child   s back is against  the seatback  they should use a belt positioning booster    seat  The child and belt positioning booster seat are held  in the vehicle by the seat belt     WARNING     e Improper installation can lead to fail
21.   known to the State of California to cause cancer and    birth defects  or other reproductive harm  In addi   tion  certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain  products of component wear contain  or emit  chemi   cals known to the State of California to cause cancer       and birth defects  or other reproductive harm     WARRANTY INFORMATION    See the Warranty Information Booklet  located on the  DVD  for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group  LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market     MOPAR   PARTS    MOPAR   fluids  lubricants  parts  and accessories are  available from an authorized dealer  They are recom   mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle  operating at its best     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  In The 50 United States And Washington  D C     If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could  cause a crash or cause injury or death  you should  immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  Administration  NHTSA  in addition to notifying the  manufacturer     Ed F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 323    If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved in  individual problems between you  your authorized  dealer  and the manufacturer     To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236  TTY  1 800 424  9153
22.  1  button located on the bottom of the mirror     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77    Assist Call    The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button  which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to  one of several predefined locations for immediate sup   port    e Roadside Assistance   If you get a flat tire  or need a  tow  just press the Assist button and you ll be con   nected to someone who can help  Roadside Assistance  will know what vehicle you re driving and its location   Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance     e Uconnect   Access Customer Care   In vehicle support  for Uconnect   Access and Uconnect   Access via Mo   bile features       Vehicle Customer Care   Total support for all other  vehicle issues     9 1 1 Call    Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road   Just press 9 1 1 on your mirror and connect     CAUTION     To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning  never    spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror   Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the  mirror clean        Outside Mirrors    To receive maximum benefit  adjust the outside mirrors  to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight  overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror     NOTE  The passenger side convex outside mirror will  give a much wider view to the rear  and especially of the  lane next to your vehicle     78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    WARNING     Vehicles and other object
23.  281  Viscosity  Engine Qil secca seces ecte et ER ees 258  Warning Flasher  Hazard   es ccas ess es ss ees 234  Warning Lights  Instrument Cluster Description       127  Warnings and Cautions  ssec s sds siete remeses os 6  Warranty Information       ese ee es EE ee ee i 322  Washer   Adding Fluid 1  ug aes bee eee reg 266  Washers  Windshield                 00000005 96  Washing Vehicle    9k DER EER crag wea as 279  Water   Driving Through                    000  187  Wheel and Wheel TEM    EE EE EE EE Ee 280  Wheel and Wheel Trim Care        oe 280  Window Fogging      ces ene es Mees RR ie ak cen 171  WindOWSi     us ME RR s wks baie BR ER UR 28   EER EE OE NE DIG 28       342 INDEX ME    Windshield Defroster        SS SS SE SS 70  Windshield Washers         SS SS ESE SS Se ee 95  Windshield Wiper Blades       o n naaa ee ee ee 265  Windshield Wipers      tas EE EE EE EE EE ee ee 95  Wiper Blade Replacement         ie ee ee ee ee 265    Wipers  Intermiittent   iss see ea RE bere AR sma 95    INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING  EQUIPMENT   Special design considerations are incorporated into this  vehicle   s electronic system to provide immunity to radio  frequency signals  Mobile two way radios and telephone  equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel   The following must be observed during installation     The positive power connection should be made directly to  the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible   The negative power connection sho
24.  C AE ER et RS  If Engine Fails To Start                   178 TACHO  usce cese deos b oe A EE oye Oe  After Starting   ax eb eir x XS RE 179 MH DRIVING THROUGH WATER   E MANUAL TRANSMISSION           oes ee 179 Flowing Rising Water            liess  187  ohif  ng    cx PERSE A ED RED ER s 180 Shallow Standing Water                  187  Recommended Shift Speeds                182 W POWER STEERING is sek eis RS eek ces 189  Skip Shift Indicator Light                 182 Power Steering Fluid Check                190   E STREET RACE MODE   IF EQUIPPED         183 W PARKING BRAKE 5 22 ike e mes 191    ll LAUNCH MODE   IF EQUIPPED            184 W BRAKE SYSTEM                     0   193    174 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed                                                                                                                                  Brake Pad Break In sisis s mss tais ee ee ee 193 Tire Pressure  5k ny yay ER ee NEE 214  Anti Lock Brake System        ii ee ee ee 195 Tire Inflation Pressures        ee ee ee ee 215  ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM      197 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation      217  Anti Lock Brake System  ABS               198 Radial Ply Tires                0 0005  217  Traction Control System  TCS               198 Tire Spinning i253 e e PER BR ias 217  Electronic Stability Control                198 Tread Wear Indicators                    218  E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION               202 Life Of Tire is
25.  II    Malfunction Indicator Light  on     poor engine performance     poor cold start and cold drivability   e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion    To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with  E 85 perform the following       drain the fuel tank  see your authorized dealer       change the engine oil and oil filter    ee STARTING AND OPERATING 227    e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the  engine controller memory    More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged  exposure to E 85 fuel     MMT In Gasoline    MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  blended into some gasoline to increase octane  Gasoline  blended with MMT provides no performance advantage  beyond gasoline of the same octane number without  MMT  Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug  life and reduces emissions system performance in some  vehicles  The manufacturer recommends that gasoline  without MMT be used in your vehicle  The MMT content  of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump   therefore  you should ask your gasoline retailer whether  the gasoline contains MMT  MMT is prohibited in Federal  and California reformulated gasoline     Materials Added To Fuel    All gasoline sold in the United States is required to  contain effective detergent additives  Use of additional  detergents or other additives is not needed under normal  conditions and they would result in additional cost   Therefore  you should not have to add anyt
26.  If this occurs   disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm     If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery  becomes disconnected  the Vehicle Security Alarm will  remain armed when the battery is reconnected  the  exterior lights will flash  the horn will sound  If this  occurs  disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm     Tamper Alert    If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in  your absence  the horn will sound three times and the  exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the  Vehicle Security Alarm  Check the vehicle for tampering        20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE ed    Electronic Immobilization System    The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau   thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine  The  system does not need to be armed or activated  Operation  is automatic  regardless of whether the vehicle is locked  or unlocked     ILLUMINATED ENTRY    The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is  opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is  not in the defeat position     The interior lights will turn on  remain on for approxi   mately 30 seconds  and then fade to off if any of the  following occur     e A door is opened using the outside door handle and  then closed     e A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitter     The interior lights will turn on and remain on for about  four seconds and then fade to off if a door is opened  using the in
27.  Material Standard MS 12106       Mix a minimum solution of 50  OAT engine coolant  that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan   dard MS 12106 and distilled water  Use higher concen   trations  not to exceed 7076  if temperatures below     34  F   37   C  are anticipated     272 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion   ized water when mixing the water engine coolant   antifreeze  solution  The use of lower guality water  will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the  engine cooling system     Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main   tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac   cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where  the vehicle is operated     NOTE  Mixing engine coolant  antifreeze  types is not  recommended and can result in cooling system damage   Drain  flush  and refill as soon as possible to avoid  damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency     Cooling System Pressure Cap    The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine  coolant  antifreeze   and to insure that engine coolant   antifreeze  will return to the radiator from the coolant  recovery bottle     The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any  accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces     WARNING       The warning words    DO NOT OPEN HOT  on the  cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution   Never add engine coolant 
28.  On Reminder        aaa aaa 90  Headlights On With Wipers                  89  Headlight Switch        0 0    0 00 00  e ae  88  High  Beam  sun RR RS E Ge a d ES 91  High Beam Indicator             lille  128  High Beam Low Beam Select                 91  Illuminated Entry               0 00000000  20  Instrument Cluster      ee sois EE EE eee 88  Intensity Control  7s esce cnr tne GER eed 92  iss EE OR ca EE Rea 92    Lights On Reminder 0 05 5 sese t 90    en INDEX 335    Malfunction Indicator  Check Engine            132  Oil Pressure is nee E  a aueh RE ae 130  Parade Mode  Daytime Brightness              94  Passing Se isn che EORR RRR Re 92  Seat Belt Reminder                 00000  127  Security Alarm  Theft Alarm                  130  voa RC  ER 292  Service Engine Soon  Malfunction Indicator      132  Theft Alarm  Security Alarm                  130  Tire Pressure Monitoring  TPMS               130  Turm Siena    s vesc eate em eee ei be 71  Vanity Mirror     2  oe ee ee ee ee ee Ek pak 79  Warning  Instrument Cluster Description         127  Loading Vehicle  TG ois ete EE bere e ORE 209  Locks 64 255 OR e EE ek EE as 25  Automatic DOON s s ke ee x ek BEE We 27  Auto Unlock  eee SEER ER ER EE AS 27  Be EE EE RE EE OR ee RC 25       336 INDEX EBENEN NEN       Power DOOF 434 cega aee Ren xe Xen 25 Vanity ise doxes Ace aed ese a we a Ee 79  Low Tire Indicator             llle 223 Modifications  Alterations  Vehicle                7  Low Tire Pressure System             
29.  Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for  headlight  parking light and instrument panel light op   eration     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89    Automatic Headlights    This system automatically turns the headlights on or off  according to ambient light levels  To turn the system on   rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A   AUTO  position  When the system is on  the headlight  time delay feature is also on  This means the headlights  will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition  in the OFF position  To turn the Automatic system off   move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position     NOTE  The engine must be running before the head   lights will come on in the automatic mode     Headlights On With Wipers  Available with  Automatic Headlights Only     When this feature is active  the headlights will turn on  approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on  if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position  In  addition  the headlights will turn off when the wipers are  turned off if they were turned on by this feature     NOTE  The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be  turned on or off using the Uconnect   System  refer to     Uconnect   Settings    in    Understanding Your Instru   ment Panel    for further information     Headlight Time Delay    This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination  for up to 90 seconds  programmable  when leaving your  vehicle in an unlit area     To a
30.  Vehicle    for further informa   tion      Keyless Ignition Node  KIN     This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with  the push of a button  as long as the Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitter is in the passenger compartment     The Keyless Ignition Node  KIN  has four operating  positions  three of which are labeled and will illuminate  when in position  The three positions are OFF  ACC  and  ON RUN  The fourth position is START  during start  RUN will illuminate     NOTE  In case the ignition does not change with the  push of a button  the RKE transmitter  Key Fob  may  have a low or dead battery     THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  Key Fob    The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitter and an emergency key  which stores in  the rear of the Key Fob           START 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle hatch  STOP should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead     as To remove the emergency key  slide the mechanical latch  ENGINE on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb  and then pull the key out with your other hand        Keyless Ignition Node  KIN     1    OFF  2     ACC  ACCESSORY   3     ON RUN       14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE       020271496    Emergency Key Removal  NOTE  You can insert the double sided emergency key  into the lock cylinders with either side up     Ignition Or Accessory On Message    Opening the driver   s d
31.  almost closed  Be sure to clear all objects from the  window before closing        Reset Auto Up    Should the Auto Up feature stop working  the window  probably needs to be reset  To reset Auto Up     1  Pull the window switch up to close the window  completely and continue to hold the switch up for an  additional two seconds after the window is closed     2  Push the window switch down firmly to the second  detent to open the window completely and continue  to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds  after the window is fully open     LIFTGATE    The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote  Keyless Entry  RKE  transmitter  the manual lock cylin   der located on the rear panel or by activating either of the  power door lock switches located on the door trim  panels        THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31    Once unlocked  the liftgate can be opened or closed  To  open the liftgate  press the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch  located under the right side of the tail panel  which is  located below the liftgate  then pull the liftgate open with  one fluid motion        021871494    Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder    To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter  press the  LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times        022271492    Pull Up On The Liftgate    32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    NOTE  The liftgate release switch will be ignored under  the following conditions     e When the ignit
32.  antifreeze  when the  engine is overheated  Do not loosen or remove the  cap to cool an overheated engine  Heat causes    pressure to build up in the cooling system  To  prevent scalding or injury  do not remove the  pressure cap while the system is hot or under  pressure    e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one  specified for your vehicle  Personal injury or en   gine damage may result        NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 273    Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant    Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant  antifreeze  is  a regulated substance reguiring proper disposal  Check  with your local authorities to determine the disposal  rules for your community  To prevent ingestion by ani   mals or children  do not store ethylene glycol based  engine coolant  antifreeze  in open containers or allow it  to remain in puddles on the ground  If ingested by a child  or pet  seek emergency assistance immediately  Clean up  any ground spills immediately     Coolant Level    The coolant bottle provides a guick visual method for  determining that the coolant level is adeguate  With the  engine OFF and cold  the level of the engine coolant   antifreeze  in the bottle should be between the ranges  indicated on the bottle     The radiator normally remains completely full  so there is  no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for    engine coolant  antifreeze  freeze point or replacing cool   ant  Advise your service attendant of this  As long as the  engine operating temper
33.  being started  with  accessories still plugged in   the vehicle must be  driven a sufficient length of time to allow the  generator to recharge the vehicle   s battery        Center Console Cupholders          118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  STORAGE  Glovebox Storage    An electronic glovebox storage compartment is located  on the passenger side of the instrument panel  Push in  the button to open the glovebox        Opened Glove Box Storage Compartment  NOTE  The glovebox storage compartment will lock  with the door locks        035270266    Glove Box Storage Compartment    NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119  Console Features Cargo Net Storage    If Equipped    Console Cubby Bin     If Equipped There is a cargo net storage area located between the    An open storage area  or cubby bin  is located in the driver ed pos ee    center console rearward of the shift lever        Cargo Net Storage Location    Center Console Cubby Bin Location    120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE    Storage Bin     If Eguipped WARNING     There is a storage bin located between the driver and  passengers seat  Pull up on the release lever to open the  storage bin     Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart   ment lid in the open position  Cellular phones  music    players  and other handheld electronic devices  should be stowed while driving  Use of these devices  while driving can cause an accident due to distrac   ti
34.  cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water   Furthermore  flowing and or rising water can carry  your vehicle away swiftly  Failure to follow this  warning may result in injuries that are serious or  fatal to you  your passengers  and others around you         Continued     188 STARTING AND OPERATING M    CAUTION   Continued       Driving through standing water may cause damage  to your vehicle   s drivetrain components  Always  inspect your vehicle   s fluids  i e   engine oil  trans   mission  axle  etc   for signs of contamination  i e    fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance  after  driving through standing water  Do not continue to  operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami     nated  as this may result in further damage  Such  damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited  Warranty    Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can  cause it to lock up and stall out  and cause serious  internal damage to the engine  Such damage is not  covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty     WARNING       Driving through standing water limits your vehi   cle s traction capabilities  Do not exceed 5 mph   8 km h  when driving through standing water      Driving through standing water limits your vehi   cle s braking capabilities  which increases stopping  distances  Therefore  after driving through stand   ing water  drive slowly and lightly press on the  brake pedal several times to dry the brakes      Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can  cause it to 
35.  failure  affect vehicle handling  and    e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  cause collisions      Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re   sult in over heating and tire failure     increase your stopping distance  Use tires of the  recommended load capacity for your vehicle  Never  overload them        Over inflation reduces a tire   s ability to cushion  TIRES     GENERAL INFORMATION y  JE M    shock  Objects on the road and chuckholes can  Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure       Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve   hicle handling and can fail suddenly  resulting in  loss of vehicle control      Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob   lems  You could lose control of your vehicle     Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  satisfactory operation of your vehicle  Three primary  areas are affected by improper tire pressure         Continued     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 215    WARNING   Continued       Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the    right or left   e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom   mended cold tire inflation pressure     Economy    Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear  patterns to develop across the tire tread  These abnormal  wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for  earlier tire replacement  Under inflation also increases  tire rolling resistance result
36.  frontal collision is required  Based on the impact sensors  signals  a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced  Front Air Bags  and seat belt pretentioners  if equipped  as    required  depending on several factors  including the se   verity and type of impact  The Air Bag inflators are  designed to provide different rates of inflation  The ORC  may prevent passenger Air Bag deployment based on  input from the Occupant Classification System  OCS      Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi   tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in  certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and  type of collision  Advanced Front Air Bags are not  expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear  side  or  rollover collisions     The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all  frontal collisions  including some that may produce sub   stantial vehicle damage     for example  some pole colli   sions  truck underrides  and angle offset collisions  On  the other hand  depending on the type and location of       50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    impact  Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes  with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a  severe initial deceleration     Because Air Bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration  over time  vehicle speed and damage by themselves are  not good indicators of whether or not an Air Bag should  have deployed     Seat belts are necessary for your protection
37.  if equipped     Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes    Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary    Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary    Change the rear axle fluid        DOCUDOC C       L          Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 307       66 000 Miles  110 000 km  or 72 000 Miles  120 000 km  or 72 Months Maintenance Service  66 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   T Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires   filter  Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    J Rotate tires  Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary   Change the rear axle fluid   Inspect the exhaust system   Change the manual transmission fluid   Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary           LLLLLEELEU             Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center
38.  ignition to attempt to reset the ABS  If the light  remains on  see your authorized dealer immediately to  have the system serviced  Also  if the    BRAKE Warning  Light    and the    ABS Warning Light    are on  and the  parking brake is fully released  see your authorized  dealer immediately     ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM    Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic  brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake  System  ABS   Traction Control System  TCS   Brake  Assist System  BAS   and Electronic Stability Control   ESC   All of these systems work together to enhance  vehicle stability and control in various driving condi   tions     198 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    Anti Lock Brake System  ABS     This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control  under adverse braking conditions  The system controls  hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and  help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking   Refer to    Anti Lock Brake System    in    Starting and  Operating    for further information     WARNING     The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  from acting on the vehicle  nor can it increase the  traction afforded by prevailing road conditions  The  ABS cannot prevent collisions  including those result     ing from excessive speed in turns  driving on very  slippery surfaces  or hydroplaning  The capabilities of  an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a  reckless or dangerous manner which could je
39.  in all colli   sions  and also are needed to help keep you in position   away from an inflating Air Bag     The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of  the Air Bag system whenever the ignition is in the START  or ON RUN position  If the ignition is in the OFF  position  in the ACC position  or not in the ignition  the  Air Bag system is not on and the Air Bags will not inflate     The ORC contains a backup power supply system that  may deploy the Air Bags even if the battery loses power  or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment     e  The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light  ry and Passenger Air Bag Disable  PAD  Indicator   Light for four to eight seconds as a self check   when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN   After the self check  the Air Bag Warning Light will turn  off and the PAD Indicator Light will function normally   Refer to    Passenger Air Bag Disable  PAD  Indicator  Light      If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of  the system  it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either  momentarily or continuously  A single chime will sound  if the light comes on again after initial startup     It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru   ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is  noted that could affect the Air Bag system  The diagnos   tics also record the nature of the malfunction     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51    WARNING     Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru   m
40.  in the shade using MOPAR   Car Wash  or a mild    car wash soap  and rinse the panels completely with  clear water     e If insects  tar  or other similar deposits have accumu   lated on your vehicle  use MOPAR   Super Kleen Bug  and Tar Remover to remove        280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    e Use a high quality cleaner wax  such as MOPAR   Wheel And Wheel Trim Care  Cleaner Wax to remove road film  stains and to protect    your paint finish  Take care never to scratch the paint    AlN wheels and wheel uim  especially atumibunt ana    chrome plated wheels  should be cleaned regularly    Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion     that may diminish the eloss or thin out the paint finish   y 5 P   To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust  use    MOPAR   Wheel Cleaner     EDE IN CAUTION     e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  such as steel wool or scouring powder that will  scratch metal and painted surfaces     Do not use scouring pads  steel wool  a bristle brush   or metal polishes  Do not use oven cleaner  These  products may damage the wheel   s protective finish   Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions  or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel   s pro   tective finish  Only MOPAR   Wheel Cleaner or  equivalent is recommended     e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi  8 274 kPa   can result in damage or removal of paint and decals      
41.  inflation pressure label  you should  determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those  tires      As an added safety feature  your vehicle has been  equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System   TPMS  that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when  one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated   Accordingly  when the low tire pressure telltale illumi   nates  you should stop and check your tires as soon as  possible  and inflate them to the proper pressure  Driving  on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to  overheat and can lead to tire failure  Under inflation also  reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life  and may affect  the vehicle   s handling and stopping ability     Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  tire maintenance  and it is the driver   s responsibility to    maintain correct tire pressure  even if under inflation has  not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS  low tire pressure telltale     Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not  operating properly  The TPMS malfunction indicator is  combined with the low tire pressure telltale  When the  system detects a malfunction  the telltale will flash for  approximately one minute and then remain continuously  illuminated  This sequence will continue upon subse   quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists   When the malfunction indicator is illuminated  the 
42.  mark appears next to the setting   showing that setting has been selected  Touch the back  arrow soft key to return to the previous menu     e Voice Response Length    When in this display  you may change the Voice Re   sponse Length settings  To change the Voice Response  Length  touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a  check mark appears next to the setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     e Touchscreen Beep    When in this display  you may turn on or shut off the  sound heard when a touch screen button  soft key  is  pressed  Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a  check mark appears next to the setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster     If Equipped    When this feature is selected  the turn by turn directions  will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a  designated turn within a programmed route  To make  your selection  touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In  Cluster soft key  until a check mark appears next to the  setting  showing that setting has been selected  Touch the  back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu        156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Clock    After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings  will be available     e Sync Time With GPS    When in this display  you may automatically 
43.  of  the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded      The Anti Lock Brake System  ABS  cannot prevent  collisions  including those resulting from excessive  speed in turns  following another vehicle too  closely  or hydroplaning      The capabilities of an Anti Lock Brake System   ABS  equipped vehicle must never be exploited in  a reckless or dangerous manner  that could jeopar   dize the user s safety or the safety of others        All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and  type as the original equipment and the tires must be  properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the  computer      Continued        WARNING     Significant over or under inflation of tires  or mixing    sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss  of braking effectiveness        Anti Lock Brake Warning Light  The    Anti Lock Brake Warning Light    will turn   f3  on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the  ignition is first turned on  If the light does not  turn on during starting  have it repaired  promptly   This light also illuminates at vehicle start up to indicate  that the ABS self check is in process  If the light remains  on after start up  or turns on and remains on at road  speeds  it may indicate a system malfunction or that the  system is inoperative  In this case  the system reverts to  standard non anti lock brakes  If this occurs  safely bring    STARTING AND OPERATING 197    the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and  cycle the
44.  pressure  readings to the receiver module  lt is particularly impor   tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on  your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres   sure  The TPMS consists of the following components  e  Receiver module  e Four TPM sensors  e Various TPMS  messages  which display in the Electronic Vehicle Infor   mation Center  EVIC   and e TPM Telltale Light The  matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly  if  equipped  has a TPM sensor     STARTING AND OPERATING 223  Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings    i The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instru   ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire  pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires   In addition  the EVIC will display a  LOW TIRE  message  and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with  the low tire pressure values flashing or changing color     Should this occur  you should stop as soon as possible  and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition  those  flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic  to the  vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation  value  Once the system receives the updated tire pres   sures  the system will automatically update  the graphic  display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change color  back to the original color  and the TPM Telltale Light will  turn off  The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20  minutes above 15 mph  24 km h  in order for the TPMS  to rece
45.  prevent accidents   The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must  e Understeer   when the vehicle is turning less than   Never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner   appropriate for the steering wheel position  which could jeopardize the user   s safety or the safety    e Oversteer   when the vehicle is turning more than  appropriate for the steering wheel position     of others        WARNING     The Electronic Stability Control  ESC  cannot pre     vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the  vehicle  nor can it increase the traction afforded by        Continued     200 STARTING AND OPERATING  ESC Operating Modes       ESC Button    058372514       The ESC system has four available operating modes   ESC On    This is the normal operating mode for the ESC  When   ever the vehicle is started  the ESC system will be in this  mode  This mode should be used for most driving  situations  The ESC should only be turned OFF for  specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs     Full Off    This mode is intended for off highway or off road use  only and should not be used on any public roadways  In  this mode  all TCS and ESC stability features are turned  OFF  To enter the    Full Off    mode  press and hold the     ESC Off    switch for five seconds while the vehicle is  stopped with the engine running  After five seconds  a  chime will sound  the    ESC Activation Malfunction In   dicator Light    will illuminate  and the  ESC OFF  mes   sage will di
46.  radiator  If    you see or hear steam coming from under the hood   do not open the hood until the radiator has had time  to cool  Never try to open a cooling system pressure  cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot        TIREFIT KIT    Small punctures up to 4     6 mm  in the tire tread can be  sealed with TIREFIT  Foreign objects  e g   screws or  nails  should not be removed from the tire  TIREFIT can    be used in outside temperatures down to approximately   4  F   20  C      This kit will provide a temporary tire seal  allowing you  to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles  160 km  with a  maximum speed of 55 mph  88 km hr         236 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation    The TIREFIT kit is located in left side of the trunk           TIREFIT Components  1  Sealant Bottle    TIREFIT Location    2  Deflation Button    3  Pressure Gauge       WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 237    4  Power Button Selecting Sealant Mode   5  Mode Select Knob Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to this  position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant   bread lose lere  and to inflate the tire  Use the Sealant    7  Air Pump Hose  Black  Hose  clear hose   6  when selecting    8  Power Plug this mode     Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses ising The Power Button    Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols    to indicate the dir of sealant mode  Push and release the Power Button  4  once to        turn On the TIREFIT kit  Push and release the  Select
47.  recommends that air conditioning  service be performed by authorized dealer or other  service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment     NOTE  Use only manufacturer approved A C system  sealers  stop leak products  seal conditioners  compressor  oil  and refrigerants     Body Lubrication    Locks and all body pivot points  including such items as  seat tracks  door hinge pivot points and rollers  liftgate   tailgate  sliding doors and hood hinges  should be lubri   cated periodically with a lithium based grease  such as  MOPAR   Spray White Lube to assure quiet  easy opera   tion and to protect against rust and wear  Prior to the  application of any lubricant  the parts concerned should    NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 265    be wiped clean to remove dust and grit  after lubricating  excess oil and grease should be removed  Particular  attention should also be given to hood latching compo   nents to ensure proper function  When performing other  underhood services  the hood latch  release mechanism  and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated     The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a  year  preferably in the Fall and Spring  Apply a small  amount of a high quality lubricant  such as MOPAR    Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder     Wiper Blades    Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge  or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner  This will  remove accumu
48.  return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF  the ignition or start the engine  This means that your  vehicle   s OBD II system is not ready and you should  not proceed to the I M station     e The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully  illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the  engine  This means that your vehicle   s OBD II system  is ready and you can proceed to the I M station     If your OBD II system is not ready  you should see your  authorized dealer or repair facility  If your vehicle was  recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement        256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    you may need to do nothing more than drive your  vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II  system to update  A recheck with the above test routine  may then indicate that the system is now ready     Regardless of whether your vehicle   s OBD II system is  ready or not  if the MIL is illuminated during normal  vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced  before going to the I M station  The I M station can fail  your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine  running     REPLACEMENT PARTS    Use of genuine MOPAR   parts for normal scheduled  maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en   sure the designed performance  Damage or failures  caused by the use of non MOPAR   parts for mainte   nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac   turer   s warranty     DEALER SERVICE    Your authorized dealer has the qu
49.  seals the system        230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    WARNING       Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the  vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is  being filled      Never add fuel when the engine is running  This is  in violation of most state and federal fire regula     tions and may cause the    Malfunction Indicator  Light  to turn on      A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  portable container that is inside of a vehicle  You  could be burned  Always place gas containers on  the ground while filling        Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release    If you are unable to open the fuel filler door  use the fuel  filler door emergency release     1  Open the trunk     2  Remove the access cover  located on the right side  inner trim panel      3  Pull the release cable   TRAILER TOWING    Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 231  RECREATIONAL TOWING  BEHIND MOTORHOME  ETC      Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle  Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground                    Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission  Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED  Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED  Rear NOT RECOMMENDED  On Trailer All OK                   NOTE  If the vehicle requires towing  make sure all four CAUTION     wheels are off the ground   Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require     ments can cause severe transmission damage  Dam   age from improper towing is not covered 
50.  seat in this vehicle  If the  child is using the lap shoulder belt  check belt fit peri   odically  A child s squirming or slouching can move the  belt out of position  If the shoulder belt contacts the face  or neck  move the child closer to the center of the vehicle   Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm  or behind their back     NOTE  For additional information  refer to  www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK  Cana   dian residents  should refer to Transport Canada s web   site for additional information  http   www tc gc ca eng   roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm       64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE ed    WARNING  To attach a child restraint tether strap     1  Move the seat forward   Improper installation of a child restraint to the tether    anchorage can lead to failure of an infant or child   2  Move the seatback to its full forward position     restraint  The child could be badly injured or killed   Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when  installing an infant or child restraint     3  Remove the child tether access cover by prying either  side with a screwdriver or similar tool  as shown        Child Restraint Tether Anchor    4    Child restraints having tether straps and hooks   E  for connection to tether anchors have been   available for some time  In fact  many child   restraint manufacturers will provide add on   tether strap kits for some of their older products  Ther
51.  setting  showing that setting has been selected  Touch the  back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu     e Flash Headlight With Lock    When this feature is selected  the front and headlights  will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159    Remote Keyless Entry  RKE  transmitter  To make your  selection  touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key  until  a check mark appears next to setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     e Sound Horn With Lock    When this feature is selected  the horn will sound when  the Key Fob Lock button is pressed  To make your  selection  touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key  until  a check mark appears next to setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks    When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected  only the  driver   s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote  Keyless Entry  RKE  transmitter UNLOCK button  When    1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected  you must press  the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the  passenger   s doors  When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press  is selected  all of the doors will unlock on the first press  of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button     NOTE  If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key  Fob Unlocks  all doors will unlock no matter which  Passi
52.  sixth gear is recommended    Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal  or  try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal  partially engaged  This will cause abnormal wear on the  clutch     Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a  complete stop     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 181    NOTE  e Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain   a certain amount of noise from the transmission is  normal  This noise can be most noticeable when the  vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged   clutch pedal released   but it may also be heard when  driving  The noise may also be more noticeable when  the transmission is warm  This noise is normal and is  not an indication of a problem with your clutch or  transmission       Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse  inhibitor system  When vehicle speed is greater than  3 mph  5 km h   the reverse inhibitor activates to help  prevent shifts into REVERSE  When at a complete stop   you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with  the ignition in the ON position  and increased shift  efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF  position  This is normal operation of the transmission  reverse inhibitor system    You must always use first gear  or Reverse  when   starting from a standing position        e Shifting gears during cold weather may require an  increased effort until the transmission lubricant is    1  warm  This is normal and not harmful to the transmi
53.  software updates     For further information  refer to the Uconnect   Access  User   s Manual     STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS    The remote sound system controls are located on the rear  surface of the steering wheel  Reach behind the wheel to  access the switches     The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a  pushbutton in the center  Pressing the top of the switch  will increase the volume  and pressing the bottom of the  switch will decrease the volume     The button located in the center of the right hand control  will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source     The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a  pushbutton in the center  The function of the left hand  control is different depending on which mode you are in     The following describes the left hand control operation in  each mode     Radio Operation    Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next  listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch  will SEEK down for the next listenable station     The button located in the center of the left hand control  will tune to the next pre set station that you have  programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons     RADIO ANTENNA    The radio antenna is located in the windshield        UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165  RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Automatic Temperature Control  ATC     Under certain conditions  the mobile phone being on in Hard Keys  your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from  yo
54.  switch forward or rearward   the seatback will move in the direction of the switch   Release the switch when the desired position has been  reached     Power Seat Recliner Switch          030971330    NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85    WARNING  CAUTION     e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous  Do not place any article under a power seat or  Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to  control which could cause a collision and serious  injury or death    e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat    the seat controls  Seat travel may become limited if  movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s  path        belts and while the vehicle is parked  Serious  injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted   TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD  seat belt      Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  chest  In a collision you could slide under the seat  belt  which could result in serious injury or death     1  Reach into the back side area of the drivers front  fender to gain access to the hood release lever        86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE          031371331 031371332 _    Hood Release Lever Location Hood Release Lever  2  Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the 3  Lift the hood upward to the full forward position   hood latches     UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87    CAUT
55.  the EVIC  Press and release the    RIGHT arrow button to display any present    diagnostic trouble codes along with a brief definition     Vehicle Hibernation    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow      button until the Hibernation icon is highlighted  in the EVIC  Press and release the RIGHT  arrow button to activate the Vehicle Hiberna   tion Mode  which minimizes vehicle battery drain while  the vehicle is being stored     152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Upper Right  Upper Left e None    None e Compass  default setting     e Compass   Outside Temp    Outside Temp  default setting  Time   e   e ime   e Range To Empty  RTE   e Range To Empty  RTE  e Average MPG  e Average MPG e d MPG  e Current MPG Trip A   e Tri  d   n B  e Trip B      Coolant Temp     e     Coolant Temp  OiT  e  T  emp     Oil Temp  P    Battery Voltage    e     Battery Voltage    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153    Restore To Defaults  Restores All Settings To Default  Settings     e Cancel    e Okay  Uconnect   ACCESS SETTINGS    The Uconnect   Access system uses a combination of soft  and hard keys located on the center of the instrument  panel that allows you to access and change the customer  programmable features     Hard Keys    Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect   Access  system in the center of the instrument panel  In addition   there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right  side o
56.  the HomeLink   indicator to change flash    rates  When it changes  it is programmed  It may take  up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases  The garage  door may open and close while you are programming       Press and hold the programmed HomeLink   button    and observe the indicator light    e If the indicator light stays on constantly  program   ming is complete and the garage door device should  activate when the HomeLink   button is pressed     e To program the two remaining HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the channels     If you unplugged the garage door opener device for  programming  plug it back in at this time   Reprogramming A Single HomeLink   Button   To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps    1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Press and hold the desired HomeLink   button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds  Do  not release the button     3  Without releasing the button proceed with     Canadian Gate Operator Programming    Step 2 and  follow all remaining steps     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113    Using HomeLink      To operate  press and release the programmed  HomeLink   button  Activation will now occur for the  programmed device  i e   garage door opener  gate opera   tor  security system  entry door lock  home office light   ing  etc     The hand held transmitter of the device may  also be used at any time     Se
57.  the instrument panel  The words   SRS  AIRBAG is embossed on the Air Bag covers        022670345    Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations       44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE ed    NOTE  These Air Bags are certified to the new Federal WARNING   Continued     regulations for Advanced Air Bags  The passenger   s      Advanced Front Air Bag is certified to the Federal    Do not put anything on or around the air bag  regulations that define Occupant Classification  Refer to covers or attempt to open them manually  You may       Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls    damage the air bags and you could be injured  because the air bags may no longer be functional     The protective covers for the air bag cushions are    WARNING     e No objects should be placed over or near the air  bag on the instrument panel  because any such    designed to open only when the air bags are  inflating      Do not drill  cut or tamper with the knee bolster in  any way      Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster  such as alarm lights  stereos  citizen band radios   etc     objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a  collision severe enough to cause the air bag to  inflate         Continued    Continued     Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45    WARNING   Continued     e Relying on the Air Bags alone could lead to more  severe injuries in a collision  The Air Bags work  with your seat belt to restrain you properly
58.  the previous menu     Compass Settings   If Equipped    After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow   ing settings will be available     e Variance    Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic  North and Geographic North  To compensate for the  differences the variance should be set for the zone where  the vehicle is driven  per the zone map  Once properly  set  the compass will automatically compensate for the  differences  and provide the most accurate compass  heading        NOTE  Keep magnetic materials away from the top of  the instrument panel  such as iPod s  Mobile Phones   Laptops and Radar Detectors  This is where the compass  module is located  and it can cause interference with the  compass sensor  and it may give false readings        a 10  6 y 7V8XV9    Compass Variance Map    040506040    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161  e Perform Compass Calibration    Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting  This  compass is self calibrating  which eliminates the need to  manually reset the compass  When the vehicle is new  the  compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display  CAL until the compass is calibrated  You may also  calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and  completing one or more 360 degree turns  in an area free  from large metal or metallic objects  until the CAL  indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off  The compass  will now function normally     Audio    After pressing the Audio soft key the follo
59.  to alert  the driver when the driver   s door is opened     Multifunction Lever    The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn  signals  headlight beam selection and passing lights  The  multifunction lever is located on the left side of the  steering column        led   mm    031571772       Multifunction Lever  Turn Signals  Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows    on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show  proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights     UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91  NOTE     e If either light remains on and does not flash  or there is  a very fast flash rate  check for a defective outside light  bulb  If an indicator fails to light when the lever is  moved  it would suggest that the indicator bulb is  defective     e A  Turn Signal On  message will appear in the EVIC   if equipped  and a continuous chime will sound if the  vehicle is driven more than 1 mile  1 6 km  with either  turn signal on     High Low Beam Switch    Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch  the headlights to high beam  Pull the multifunction lever  toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam        92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Flash To Pass    You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you  This  will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is  released     Interior Lights  The interior lights come on wh
60.  upward to the first detent   This feature brightens all text displays such as the  odometer  EVIC  if equipped   and radio when the park   ing lights or headlights are on     031471323    Interior Lights       WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS    The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers  and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN  or ACC position  The multifunction lever is located on  the left side of the steering column        031571772    Windshield Wiper Washer Control    UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95  Intermittent Wiper System    Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions  make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be   tween cycles desirable  Rotate the end of the multifunc   tion lever to the first detent position  and then turn the  end of the lever to select the desired delay interval  There  are five delay settings  which allow you to regulate the  wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second  to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between  cycles  The delay intervals will double in duration when  the vehicle speed is 10 mph  16 km h  or less     Wiper Operation    Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first  detent  past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper  operation  or to the second detent past the intermittent  settings for high speed wiper operation        96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed    CAUTION     e Tum the windshield wipers off
61.  when driving  through an automatic car wash  Damage to the  windshield wipers may result if the wiper control  is left in any position other than off    In cold weather  always turn off the wiper switch  and allow the wipers to return to the    Park    posi   tion before turning off the engine  If the wiper    switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the  windshield  damage to the wiper motor may occur  when the vehicle is restarted     Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents  the windshield wiper blades from returning to the  off position  If the windshield wiper control is  turned off and the blades cannot return to the off  position  damage to the wiper motor may occur        Mist Feature    When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from  a passing vehicle is needed  push the washer knob   located on the end of the multifunction lever  inward to  the first detent and release  The wipers will cycle one  time and automatically shut off     NOTE  The mist feature does not activate the washer  pump  therefore  no washer fluid will be sprayed on the  windshield  The wash function must be used in order to  spray the windshield with washer fluid     Windshield Washers    To use the windshield washer  push the washer knob   located on the end of the multifunction lever  inward to  the second detent  Washer fluid will be sprayed and the  wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer  knob is released from this position  If the washer knob is  depre
62.  with a soft cloth     Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  buckles do not work properly        MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283    Aero Group     If Equipped    Please review all of the precautionary notes regarding the  Aero Group option     Front Splitter       The front splitter will not flex or compress against  impacts from the front  If an impact does occur  have the  splitter inspected  A cracked or delaminated splitter  should be replaced     P    072671482    Front Splitter  Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone  you allow to operate the vehicle        284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE    CAUTION  FUSES    Power Distribution Center    Use care when approaching parking blocks  tall    speed bumps and garage curbs  These surfaces can   The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine  damage your splitter  compartment on the driver   s side of the vehicle  This  center contains fuses and relays        Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over  speed bumps  Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a  slight angle may improve your clearance     CAUTION       Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage  to your splitter       Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 3 8  inch  10 mm  on the front edge  This will avoid  damage to the carbon fiber panel       073071483       Power Distribution Center    Ned MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285                                                             Cavity Relay Cartridge Fu
63. 0 seconds or until the red  indicator flashes     NOTE     e Erasing all channels should only be performed when  programming HomeLink   for the first time  Do not  erase channels when programming additional buttons     e If you have any problems  or require assistance  please  call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or  on the Internet at  www HomeLink com for information or assistance           108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Programming A Rolling Code    For programming garage door openers that were manu   factured after 1995  These garage door openers can be  identified by the    LEARN    or    TRAIN    button located  where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door  opener  It is NOT the button that is normally used to  open and close the door  The name and color of the  button may vary by manufacturer     0000       Training The Garage Door Opener    1     Door Opener  2     Training Button       1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109    2     Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm   away from the HomeLink   button you wish to pro   gram while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in  view       Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink      button you want to program and the hand held trans   mitter button       Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi     cator light  The HomeLink   indicator will flash slowly  and then rapidly after HomeLink   has received the  f
64. ATING M    WARNING   Continued     e Do not drive too fast for road conditions  especially    Safe Operating Tips    WARNING     To use your brakes and accelerator more safely    follow these tips      Do not  ride  the brakes by resting your foot on the  pedal  This could overheat the brakes and result in    unpredictable braking action  longer stopping dis   tances  or brake damage    e When descending mountains or hills  repeated  braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking  control  Avoid repeated heavy braking by down   shifting the transmission whenever possible      Continued        when roads are wet or slushy  A wedge of water can  build up between the tire tread and the road  This  hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction     braking ability  and control      After going through deep water or a car wash   brakes may become wet  resulting in decreased  performance and unpredictable braking action   Dry the brakes by gentle  intermittent pedal action  while driving at very slow speeds        Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 195    Anti Lock Brake System    The Anti Lock Brake System  ABS  is designed to aid the  driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse  braking conditions  The system operates with a separate  computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent  wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery  surfaces     NOTE  During severe braking conditions  a pulsing sen   sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard  This  is normal  indi
65. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is  dangerous for a number of reasons  A child or  others could be seriously or fatally injured  Chil     dren should be warned not to touch the parking  brake  brake pedal or the shift lever      Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle  or  in a location accessible to children  and do not  leave Keyless Enter N Go   in the ACC or ON   RUN mode  A child could operate power windows   other controls  or move the vehicle        021870401    Power Door Lock Switch  If you press the power door lock switch while the  ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position  and any  front door is open  the power locks will not operate  This  prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in  the vehicle  Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or  closing the door will allow the locks to operate  If a door    NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27    is open  and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN  position  a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the  Key Fob     Automatic Door Locks    The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled   When enabled  the door locks will lock automatically  when the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 mph  8 km h   The  auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your  authorized dealer for service     Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit    The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with  power door locks if     1  The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en   abled     2  Th
66. CLE 291    e Block the wheels  Do not apply the parking brake  Then  either disconnect the battery at the negative  terminal or use the    Battery Save Feature    to conserve  battery power  Refer to    Maintenance Procedures   Battery Save Feature    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle     for further information       Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires   Cover each block with indoor outdoor carpeting and  place them between the tires and concrete  This will  prevent tire flat spotting    NOTE  Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con    trol system to lose memory of some    learned    functions    After reconnecting the battery  the engine may run rough   until the control module    relearns    these functions  Us    e If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera  ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine    tures  either remove the battery and store it in a dry  controller from loosing its memory   well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger  1 5    Amp  with automatic shutdown   overcharge protec   tion to the battery  However  do not leave the trickle  charger hooked up to the battery without being   Use care when disconnecting the remote positive  plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet  as this will result in   cable  It is connected to the battery and can short out  further drain on the vehicle s battery  If the vehicle is   to any metal on the vehicle  Always tape or wrap the  not going to be driven in the next three weeks  p
67. Continued     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61    WARNING   Continued     how strong you are  The child and others could be    badly injured  Any child riding in your vehicle  should be in a proper restraint for the child s size        There are different sizes and types of restraints for  children from newborn size to the child almost large  enough for an adult safety belt  Always check the child  seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat  for your child  Use the restraint that is correct for your  child     Infant and Child Restraints    e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward   facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or  until they reach either the height or weight limit of  their rear facing child safety seat  Two types of child  restraints can be used rearward facing  infant carriers  and convertible child seats       The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the    vehicle  It is recommended for children from birth  until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant  carrier  Convertible child seats can be used either  rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle  Con   vertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in  the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do   so they can be used rearward facing by children who  have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than  at least two years old  Children should remain  rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or
68. D  eR ener a Se be 104  Automatic Headlights Only                 97 Turning ParkView   On Or Off     With  E TILT STEERING COLUMN                  97 Touch   Screen Radio               000  106  Bl ADJUSTABLE PEDALS                     98 ME EDOM DIENER OMI z103  Adjustable Foot Rest    ee aaua 100 Pers DU BEL ep ane Home ED LU  WI ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL         jjj     ES EN ae ese Rees EB  Programming A Non Rolling Code           110             NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75                                                                      Canadian Gate Operator Programming         Hp   N STORAGE si ase EE ORE ates eee a 118   Using HomeLink            oes esse see 113 Glovebox Storage      EE EE Ee ee ae  118   SECUT  Y AE Kae RAS dua EE EE 113 Console Features   Troubleshooting Tips ss sste ges tonii 113 DoorStorage  ornen eee   General Information  e secie se EE EE Ee ee 114 BM REAR WINDOW FEATURES                121  B ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS      ses es 115 Rear Window Defroster                   121       ll CUPHOLDERS     If Equipped               117    76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed  MIRRORS    Automatic Dimming Mirror    This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare  from vehicles behind you  This feature will be defaulted  on  and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in  reverse        030471324    Automatic Dimming Mirror  NOTE  The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9 1
69. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE ed    NOTE  In order to ensure proper operation  the Elec   tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut  down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at  the same time  If this occurs  the Electronic Speed Control  System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic  Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired  vehicle set speed     To Activate    Push the ON OFF button  The Cruise Indicator Light in  the Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  will  illuminate  To turn the system off  push the ON OFF  button a second time  The Cruise Indicator Light will  turn off  The system should be turned off when not in  use     WARNING     Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on  when not in use is dangerous  You could accidentally    set the system or cause it to go faster than you want   You could lose control and have an accident  Always  leave the system OFF when you are not using it        To Set A Desired Speed    Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON  When the vehicle  has reached the desired speed  press the SET     button  and release  Release the accelerator and the vehicle will  operate at the selected speed     NOTE  The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed  and on level ground before pressing the SET button     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103    To Deactivate    A soft tap on the brake pedal  pushing the CANCEL  button  or normal brake pressure while sl
70. H   Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings  Service Tire Pressure System    Parking Brake Engaged    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143    e    e    e    e    e     e     e     e     e     e     Brake Fluid Low   Service Electronic Braking System  Engine Temperature Hot   Battery Voltage Low   Service Electronic Throttle Control  Lights On   Right Turn Signal Light Out   Left Turn Signal Light Out   Turn Signal On   Service Airbag System   Service Airbag Warning Light  Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled    e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled     Front Seatbelts Unbuckled   e Door Open   e Doors Open   e Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling  EVIC Amber Telltales    This area will show amber caution telltales  These tell   tales include       Low Fuel Telltale  When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal     11 0 L  this light will turn on  and remain on until  fuel is added     144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    e Electronic Speed Control Ready  This light will turn on when the electronic   G  speed control is ON  For further information   refer to  Electronic Speed Control  in  Under   standing The Features Of Your Vehicle     EVIC Red Telltales    This area will show red telltales  These telltales include       Door Ajar  This light will turn on to indicate that one or  more doors may be ajar     e Trunk Ajar    Faber    This telltale is on when the trunk is not closed     e Oil Pressure Warning Light    A7 This tellt
71. ILT STEERING COLUMN    The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction  lever on the left side of the steering column  To tilt the  column  simply pull the release lever rearward toward  you and then move the steering wheel upward or down   ward as desired  When the column is in the desired    98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed    position  push the release lever forward to lock the    column firmly in place     031771769       Tilt Steering Column Lever    WARNING     Do not adjust the steering column while driving   Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv     ing with the steering column unlocked  could cause  the driver to lose control of the vehicle  Failure to  follow this warning may result in serious injury or  death        ADJUSTABLE PEDALS    The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a  greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and  seat position  This feature allows the brake  accelerator   and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver  to provide improved position with the steering wheel   The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF     The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of  the steering column     031971771       Adjustable Pedals Switch  NOTE     e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full  pedal travel     e Further small adjustments may be necessary to find  the best possible seat pedal position     UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES 
72. ION     e Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong  gust of wind are likely  Such a place might be by  the side of the road where large trucks pass by   Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood  Al   ways close the hood in such situations      To prevent possible damage  do not slam the hood  to close it  Simply lower the hood until it is open    approximately 6 in  15 cm  and then drop it  This  should secure both latches  Never drive the vehicle  unless the hood is fully closed with both latches  engaged        Opened Hood  NOTE  The recommended lift point is to place the lifting    hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up  The WARNING     assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal  usage position  Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your  vehicle  If the hood is not fully latched  it could open        Continued     88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    WARNING   Continued     when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision     Failure to follow this warning could result in serious  injury or death        LIGHTS  Headlight Switch    TE The headlight switch is located on the left side of    the instrument panel  This switch controls the   operation of the headlights  parking lights  instru   ment panel lights  instrument panel light dimming and  interior lights           031471319    Headlight Switch  Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent  for parking light and instrument panel light operation  
73. Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary        H Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary              Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                314 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE ed       138 000 Miles  230 000 km  or  138 Months Maintenance    Service Schedule   11 Change the engine oil and engine oil  filter       Rotate tires           Odometer Reading Date       Repair Order   Dealer Code       Signature  Authorized Service Center          144 000 Miles  240 000 km  or 144 Months Maintenance Service  Schedule   H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter     1 Rotate tires     1 Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped     H Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    H Inspect the exhaust system    H Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary    Change the manual transmission fluid    Change the rear axle fluid        Lc       Odometer Reading Date       Repair Order   Dealer Code       Signature  Authorized Service Center          NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 315       150 000 Miles  250 000 km  or  150 Months Maintenance    Service Schedul
74. NNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    your selection  touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey   until a check mark appears next to setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     e Daytime Running Lights   If Equipped    When this feature is selected  the headlights will turn on  whenever the engine is running  To make your selection   touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key  until a  check mark appears next to setting  showing that setting  has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key to  return to the previous menu     e Flash Headlights With Lock    When this feature is selected  the headlights will flash  when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote  Keyless Entry  RKE  transmitter  This feature may be  selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature  selected  To make your selection  touch the Flash Head   lights with Lock soft key  until a check mark appears    next to setting  showing that setting has been selected   Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous  menu     Doors  amp  Locks    After pressing the Doors  amp  Locks soft key the following  settings will be available     e Auto Unlock On Exit    When this feature is selected  all doors will unlock when  the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the  PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver   s door is  opened  To make your selection  touch the Auto Unlock  On Exit soft key  until a check mark appears next to 
75. NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE ed    Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills    The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the  vehicle set speed     NOTE  The Electronic Speed Control system maintains  speed up and down hills  A slight speed change on  moderate hills is normal     On steep hills  a greater speed loss or gain may occur so  it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed  Control     WARNING     Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the  system cannot maintain a constant speed  Your ve     hicle could go too fast for the conditions  and you  could lose control and have an accident  Do not use  Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads  that are winding  icy  snow covered or slippery        PARKVIEW   REAR BACK UP CAMERA     IF  EQUIPPED    Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView   Rear  Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen  image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever  the shift lever is put into REVERSE  The image will be  displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau   tion note to    check entire surroundings    across the top of  the screen  After five seconds this note will disappear   The ParkView   camera is located on the rear of the  vehicle above the rear License plate     When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE  the rear  camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen  appears again     When displayed  static grid lines will illustrate the width  of the vehicle and wi
76. NOTE  DO NOT overfill transmission  damage can occur     CAUTION     Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac   turer   s recommended fluid may cause deterioration        Continued     278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    CAUTION   Continued     in transmission shift quality and or damage to the    transmission  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and  Genuine Parts    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for  fluid specifications        Change Transmission Fluid    Refer to    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper mainte   nance intervals  If contaminated with water  change the  fluid immediately  See your authorized dealer for service     Hydraulic Clutch  Master Cylinder   Clutch Fluid Level Check    The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated  volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder  reservoir  In the event of leakage or wear  use only the    manufacturer   s recommended brake fluid  Refer to    Flu   ids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in    Maintaining Your  Vehicle    for further information     Rear Axle  Axle Lubricant Level Check    Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil  leakage every 12 months or 6 000 miles  10 000 km   This  check should be made with the vehicle level and on the  ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist  The  axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the  filler plug and a point approximately 3 8 inch  9 5 mm   below the filler plug  If adding axle lub
77. NSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES            125  WM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER                   126  ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS       127  ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION  CENTER  EVIC   es ER Rem 138  Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Displays  s s  rk Rh 140  Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Messages a a editos e peg eee aang re 142  O EVIC Amber Telltales             llle 143  EVIC Red Telltales             se ss sa 144                EVIC Green Telltales         llle          EVIC Selectable Menu Items                                     Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items         152   Uconnect   ACCESS SETTINGS               153   Hard Keys ied dos sor hah ah ed aa 153   Soft Keys  ee Ee RE sed Ree PEA Coed Ee 153  Customer Programmable Features       Uconnect   Access System Settings           153   ll Uconnect  RADIOS     IF EQUIPPED          163       124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    N iPod   USB MP3 CONTROL                    IF EQUIPPED  noet krausi ami ea are ok ound 163   ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS        164  Radio Operation    xs sia e ook N s 164   B RADIO ANTENNA  444 ente ER Rh ayes 164  ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES    165  B CLIMATE CONTROLS sos sees ER Ekke eN wag 165                Automatic Temperature Control  ATC          165                                              Summer Operation        ees ee ee ee ee 170  Winter Operation       sess EE EE EE Ee ee ee 171  Vacation 
78. OF YOUR VEHICLE 99    CAUTION     Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals  or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage  to the pedal controls  Pedal travel may become lim   ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the  adjustable pedal   s path     WARNING     Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving   You could lose control and have an accident  Always  adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked        100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE    Adjustable Foot Rest To adjust the pedal   This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest 1  Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable  forward or backward and to rotate it upward or down  position     d to allow for greater driving comfort     ee 2  Using a 13 mm socket wrench  loosen the nut on the    pedal     3  Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate  it upward or downward as desired     4  Tighten the nut  being careful not to over tighten it        Adjustable Foot Rest    EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101  ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL    When engaged  the Electronic Speed Control takes over    accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph     40 km h   S3ESC    LAUNCH       The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the  right side of the steering wheel         Qj EN  Electronic Speed Control Buttons    1    ON OFF 2     RES    4     CANCEL 3     SET      032173331       102 UNDERSTANDING TH
79. OUR KEYS               12 To Arm The System              0 00000  18  Keyless Ignition Node  KIN                 12 To Disarm The Syste eo caeai rarasan a 19  de rei EER HEER ees 13 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY                     20  Ignition Or Accessory On Message           14 B REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY  RKE              20   E SENTRY KEY             0 0 0    00000 15 To Unlock The Doors           lessen  21  Replacement Keys       ee EE EE EE Ee 16 To Lock The Doors       EE Es 22  Customer Key Programming                17 To Unlatch The Liftgate               0   22  General Information                   0  17 Using The Panic Alarm                    22   ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM         18 H Programming Additional Transmitters         23  Rearming of the System                   18 Transmitter Battery Replacement             23                      10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE                                                    General Information                 0005 24  BE DOOR LOCKS wesc kg    RR RR as 25  Power Door Locks            llle  25  B WINDOWS                 eee 28  Power Windows      EE SE es eee 28  Auto Down Feature       Ee se 29  AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection      If Equipped   ue 94 Se bane be tome te ged HP 29  Reset  Auto Up ss ecc nan cepe RR 30  B LIFIGATE oi eg ica Res 30  MH OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS                  33  Lap Shoulder Belts           llle  34                Lap Shoulder Belt Untwi
80. OUR VEHICLE 258       ENGINE COMPARTMENT     8 4L        s   s  OMNE    1     Washer Fluid Reservoir 6     Brake Clutch Fluid Reservoir  2     Coolant Pressure Cap 7     Engine Oil Fill   3     Engine Oil Dipstick 8     Power Steering Fluid Reservoir  4     Power Distribution Center 9     Air Cleaner Filter    5     Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post       254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM  OBD II     To meet new government regulations and promote  cleaner air  your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated  onboard diagnostic system called OBD II  This system  monitors the performance of the emissions and engine  control systems  When these systems are operating prop   erly  your vehicle will provide excellent performance and  fuel economy  as well as engine emissions well within  current government regulations     If any of these systems require service  the OBD II system  will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light  It will also  store diagnostic codes and other information to assist  your service technician in making repairs  Although your  vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing  see  your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible     CAUTION     Prolonged driving with the light on could cause  further damage to the emission control system  It    could also affect fuel economy and driveability  The  vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions  tests can be performed        If the light is flashing  severe cataly
81. OWNER   S MANUAL    VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA   With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada  the name  Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the  name Chrysler Canada Inc  used in substitution therefore     DRIVING AND ALCOHOL   Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of  accidents    Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood  alcohol levels far below the legal minimum  If you are  drinking  don t drive  Ride with a designated non drinking  driver  call a cab  a friend  or use public transportation     WARNING     Driving after drinking can lead to an accident  Your    perceptions are less sharp  your reflexes are slower   and your judgment is impaired when you have been  drinking  Never drink and then drive        This manual illustrates and describes the operation of  features and equipment that are either standard or optional  on this vehicle  This manual may also include a description  of features and equipment that are no longer available or  were not ordered on this vehicle  Please disregard any  features and equipment described in this manual that are  not on this vehicle     Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in  design and specifications  and or make additions to or  improvements to its products without imposing any obliga   tion upon itself to install them on products previously  manufactured     Copyright    2012 Chrysler Group LLC          SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS                                          
82. Of Your Vehicle        EVIC Selectable Menu Items    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until  the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the  EVIC        Tachometer    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow  button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted  in the EVIC  Press and release the RIGHT    arrow button to change the display between  full tachometer or with digital speedometer     MPH     km h    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the MPH km h icon is highlighted in the EVIC  Press  and release the RIGHT arrow button to change the  display between MPH or km h    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147    Vehicle Info  Customer Information Features     Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow   button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted   in the EVIC  Press and release the RIGHT   arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis   played  Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll  through the following information sub menus     Tire Pressure    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Tire Pressure    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following  will be displayed     e If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is  displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of  the ICON     e If one or more tires have low pressure  The tire  pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the  pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different  color than 
83. RTING YOUR VEHICLE 25    WARNING   Continued     3  The RKE transmitter battery may be weak or dead   The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three    years    Never leave children alone in a vehicle  Leaving  unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a  DOOR LOCKS number of reasons  A child or others could be    injured seriously or fatally  Don t leave the ignition  in the ON position  A child could operate power  windows  other controls  or move the vehicle     WARNING       Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when  entering or exiting your vehicle  They can be hot  Power Door Locks  enough to burn you  Observe the warning labels on  each door closure panel    e For personal security in the event of an collision        A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel  Use  this switch to lock or unlock the doors     WARNING     e For personal security and safety in the event of a    lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when  you park and leave the vehicle    e When leaving the vehicle  always cycle the ignition  to the OFF position lock  and lock your vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause  severe personal injuries and death     collision  lock the vehicle doors before you drive as  well as when you park and leave the vehicle         Continued    Continued     26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE    WARNING   Continued     e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with  access to an unlocked vehicle      
84. S   gt     TEM  ique  B  ub       i  i  g  i  i  i        3  i   JE    i  Li      H      g  i     E   3  3  H       i  i   p ied            O  Po  T  ein  E  op    Ed         i     i  l  E  3  i  E         8  i  3    eLecraome  CONTROL OFF 010533317    6 INTRODUCTION  WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS    This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op   erating procedures that could result in a collision or  bodily injury  It also contains CAUTIONS against proce   dures that could result in damage to your vehicle  If you  do not read this entire Owners Manual  you may miss  important information  Observe all Warnings and Cau   tions     VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER    The Vehicle Identification Number  VIN  is on the left  front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from  outside the vehicle through the windshield  This number  also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure  Label affixed to a window on your vehicle  the vehicle  registration  and the title     Vehicle Identification Number  NOTE  It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN             010832798    ee INTRODUCTION 7    VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS    WARNING     Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could    seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and  may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or  death           THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  Es                                                                                           CONTENTS   E A WORD ABOUT Y
85. SD  1   64 HC Micro           ASD  2   65 G8VA         Run Accy  1  Pop Up                         290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed  VEHICLE STORAGE    We recommend that you follow these guidelines for  storing your vehicle for extended periods     CAUTION     e When installing the power distribution center  cover  it is important to ensure the cover is properly  positioned and fully latched  Failure to do so may  allow water to get into the power distribution  center and possibly result in an electrical system    failure    When replacing a blown fuse  it is important to use  only a fuse having the correct amperage rating  The  use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may  result in a dangerous electrical system overload  If  a properly rated fuse continues to blow  it indicates  a problem in the circuit that must be corrected        Fill the fuel tank  This will prevent water condensation  inside the tank  If you plan to store your vehicle more  than two months  add an anti oxidant fuel stabilizer to  the fuel tank     Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion  related acids in the crankcase     Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to  at least  20  F   29 C      Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum  pressure     Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish   Store the vehicle in a dry  well ventilated location     Move the wiper blades away from the windshield     NEE ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHI
86. STRUMENT PANEL  Range To Empty  RTE     Current Miles Per Gallon  MPG   Trip A    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow  button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in  the EVIC  Toggle left or right to select Trip A or  Trip B    Toggle left or right to select Trip A or  Trip B  The Trip A information will display the following     i tripA    e Distance   e Average Fuel Economy  e Average Speed   e Elapsed Time    Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the  information        Trip B     Press and release the Left or Right arrow but     tripB ton until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the    EVIC  Toggle left or right to select Trip A or  Trip B   The Trip B information will display the  following       Distance   e Average Fuel Economy  e Average Speed     Elapsed Time    Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the  information        Audio      Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow  button until the Audio display icon is high     lighted in the EVIC  Press and release the  SELECT RIGHT arrow button to display the   active source     Stored Messages    Press and release the UP arrow button until the   Messages display icon is highlighted in the   EVIC  This feature shows the number of stored   warning messages  Pressing the RIGHT arrow  button will allow you to see what the stored messages  are     UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151    Diagnostic Codes  Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow  button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high   lighted in
87. Se EE Rs 80  Power Seats  ss Ee ik GE aes Cede a dad 83   ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD           85    B LIGHTS vu DE eN ER rae RR Xd 88                                                             Headlight Switch    Automatic Headlights       sesse es se se 89  Headlights On With Wipers  Available with  Automatic Headlights Only                 89  Headlight Time Delay                 0   89  Daytime Running Lights  DRL               90  Lights On Reminder                00005 90  O Multifunction Lever           llle  90  Turn Signals    eps ee ose ented eae 91  High Low Beam Switch               0   91       74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed                                                                                                                                     Flash Io Pass i000 4 3 E ee RR RE Aad 92 TO ACH V ate ca ace aesa ee bra e YER ew N NE 102  Interior Lights         a paai andia saagaa 92 To Set A Desired Speed         ee ee 102  ll WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS        95 TO Deachvate  si SE det tbat aa tes 103  Intermittent Wiper System            issus  95 To Resume Speed         EE EE Ee ee 103  Wiper Operations   sos sei EE DER DE eas 95 To Vary The Speed Setting                 103  Mist Features oc ase RE dove x EDU wee eed 96 To Accelerate For Passing                 103  Windshield Washers               00000  96 WE PARKVIEW   REAR BACK UP CAMERA      Headlights On With Wipers  Available with IE EQUIPPE
88. Standard No  109  Grades B and A repre   sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test  wheel  than the minimum required by law     WARNING     The temperature grade for this tire is established for  a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded     Excessive speed  under inflation  or excessive load   ing  either separately or in combination  can cause  heat buildup and possible tire failure        INDEX       328 INDEX MEM    About Your Brakes es e samsa kirasas a ee ee ee 193  ABS  Anti Lock Brake System                  195  Adding Engine Coolant  Antifreeze              271  Adding  F  el  mrss eai dor gods  mete ale aa 229  Adding Washer Fluid         ee ee ee ee ee 266  Additives  Fuel  e cras gitat pesed aa ss ss se 227  Adjustable  Pedals  sss 2224s etr Rebus 98  ii AE cca bes e eR ES am E EE rr ae 43  Airbag Deployment           EE EE EE ee se ag 49  Airbag Light soeke EER SEER Re n 50  Airbag Maintenance      see EE EE ee eae 58  Air Cleaner  Engine  Engine Air Cleaner Filter         259  Air Conditioner Maintenance                   263  Air Conditioning  Operating Tips               172  Air Conditioning Refrigerant                  263  Air Conditioning System                000  263  Air Pressure  Tires          2l 215  Alarm Light   ciet e mac Oed ein 130  Alarm System  Security Alarm                   18    Alterations  Modifications  Vehicle                7  Antennas rs eser erp anten S unte SUM Re dne 164  Antifreeze  Engine Coolant       
89. Storage s isyana ee Ee Ee ee ee 171  Window Fogging and Frosting              171  Outside Air Intake                  00 0  171    Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather  Conditions   ise ciu ee rers ES ee Aw 172    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125  INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES       040170346    1     Air Outlet 6     Passenger Air Bag 11     Climate Controls  2     Sound System Speaker 7     Glove Compartment 12     Dimmer Controls  3     Instrument Cluster 8     Uconnect  System 13     Headlight Switch  4     Keyless Enter N Go    Start Stop Button 9     Uconnect   System Hard Controls  5     Glove Compartment Lock 10     Switch Bank  Screen Off  Hazard    Switch  Back Button        126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  INSTRUMENT CLUSTER    P    1007 20 0   Bu           Q  G   Wee   e   1    040371768          INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS  1  Speedometer   Indicates vehicle speed    2  Air Bag Warning Light    0     t    This light will turn on for four to eight seconds  as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled  to ON RUN  If the light is either not on during  starting  stays on  or turns on while driving   have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as  soon as possible  Refer to  Occupant Restraints  in     Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle  for  further information     3  Seat Belt Reminder Light    When the ignition is first cycled to ON RUN  this  light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a  bulb check  During th
90. T arrow button for two seconds  to reset displayed selected features that can be reset     040971549       140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL    e LEFT Arrow Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Displays       Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the    1 main menu from an info screen or sub menu  item     t  eeu       041072521    The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the  cluster and consists of the following sections     NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141    1     Main Screen     The inner ring of the display will  illuminate in grey under normal conditions  yellow for  non critical warnings  red for critical warnings and  white for on demand information       Audio   Phone Information and Sub menu Informa     tion     Whenever there are sub menus available  the  position within the sub menus is shown here     3  Reconfigurable Telltales Information      Selectable Information  Vehicle Info       Telltales Indicators    SRT  Fuel  Economy  Stored Messages  Audio  Trip A  Trip B   Average MPG       Suspension Status    ESC Status      Launch Control status when launch control mode is    entered     The main display area will normally display the main  menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main  menu  The main display area also displays  pop up   messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn   ing or information messages  These pop up messages fall  into several categories     e Five Second Stored Messag
91. We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts  throughout their pregnancy  Keeping the mother safe is  the best way to keep the baby safe     Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt  across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible   Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  abdomen  That way the strong bones of the hips will take  the force if there is an collision     Seat Belt Extender    If a seat belt is too short  even when extended fully  your  authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt  extender  This extender should only be used if the  existing belt is not long enough  When it is not required   remove the extender  and store it     ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43    WARNING     Using a seat belt extender when not needed can  increase the risk of injury in a collision  Only use the       seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long  enough when it is worn low and snug  and in the  recommended seating positions  Remove and store  the extender when not needed        Driver And Passenger Supplemental Restraint  System  SRS      Air Bags    This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for the driver  and passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint  systems  The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is 1     Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  mounted in the steering wheel  The passenger s Ad        Knee Polster   vanced Front Air Bag is mounted underneath a cover in   the passenger s side of
92. a BED RR 71  Filters   Air Cleaner       SEE SE ees 259   Engine OU   amp  sei sEr Be ee EE BERE tages E oars 259   Engine Oil Disposal      EE cr EE EE ee 259  Flashers   Hazard Warning       2  ee ees se ee ee se ee 234   Turn  Signal ese EER eme he cag EED eee 71  Hash To CPass          llle 92  Flooded Engine Starting sses ess asss renni  178  Fluid Capacities 23 2 3  1e x3 DER ie e Sa 295    Fluid Leaks    Fluid Level Checks    Brakes sanee atte DE OE E ae 275  Capacities sisie RE d baden e ER Eee 295  Cl  tch  Fluid  iua ac RR Ra m Rm ae N 278  Cooling System   i Les verre EE EER rns 269  Engine Ol  eis Es we niine dera RR des 257  Manual Transmission                   se 277  Power Ste  ring   esa cc ye en DRR ER N 190  Fluids  Lubricants and Genuine Parts           296  Four Way Hazard Flasher             lille  234  Freeing A Stuck Vehicle            lille  249  ER RE geo Re ed XX GP ERG S 225  Additives eta aia E AREE GP aS 227  Clean Air uoa eua EER RR EE EE OUR E Y es 225  Ethanol 44446 i eet kn ar DR RS 226  GasOline s iacu mr eR REY e REX 225  GAUPE cu s eure ME EE ME OR 130  Materials Added        0 0 00    eee eee 227  Methanol  seses Ka gd pea ald WA ew des elise RR Re N 226    NEE INDEX 333    Octane Rating ces caci e NR EE RE rs 225  Requirements s 22e dort RE roba N Mee Di cs 225  Tank Capacity resi ise R3 ere BOER GEREM de    295  FUSES   ER OE ET ER EE ER a s 284  Garage Door Opener  HomeLink                 106  Gasoline  Clean Air      SEE SS ee ee 225
93. ake sure the Mode Select Knob  5  is in the  Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting  sealant into them  The TIREFIT Sealant is only in   tended to seal punctures less than 1   4 in  6 mm   diameter in the tread of your vehicle     e Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses     Ed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 239    WARNING       Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the  vehicle closest to traffic  Pull far enough off the  road to avoid the danger of being hit when using  the TIREFIT kit      Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the  following circumstances      If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately  1 4 in   6 mm  or larger      If the tire has any sidewall damage     If the tire has any damage from driving with  extremely low tire pressure      If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat  tire      If the wheel has any damage      If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or  the wheel      Continued     WARNING   Continued       Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat  source    e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision  or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the  vehicle  Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place  provided  Failure to follow these warnings can  result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you   your passengers  and others around you    e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to  come in contact with hair  eyes  or clothing  TIRE   FIT is harmful if inhaled  swallowe
94. aking  resulting in sudden brake failure   This could result in a accident   Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in  spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts  causing  the brake fluid to catch fire  Brake fluid can also  damage painted and vinyl surfaces  care should be  taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces         Continued     Ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277    WARNING   Continued     e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate    the brake fluid  Brake seal components could be  damaged  causing partial or complete brake failure   This could result in an accident        Change Brake Fluid    Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo   sphere over time  If the fluid becomes contaminated with  water  brake performance will deteriorate  Therefore  the  brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in  the    Maintenance Schedule     Refer to    Maintenance  Schedule    for further information  See your authorized  dealer for service     Manual Transmission  Transmission Fluid Level Check    Check the fluid in the transmission when performing  other underbody services     Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on  the left side of the transmission  The fluid level should be  approximately 1 4 in  6 4 mm  below the bottom of the  fill hole  Add fluid  if necessary  to maintain the proper  level  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in     Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information     
95. aks and all parts for  T Change the rear axle fluid  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary    ag          Q Adjust parking brake on vehicles  equipped with four wheel disc    Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary                    brakes   Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date  Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                310 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se       102 000 Miles  170 000 km  or 108 000 Miles  180 000 km  or 108 Months Maintenance Service   102 Months Maintenance Schedule   Service Schedule   11 Change the engine oil and engine oil  filter     1 Rotate tires     Change the engine oil and engine oil filter    Rotate tires    Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped     Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    Change the rear axle fluid    Change the manual transmission fluid    Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary           O OO C O C O          Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 311    114 000 Miles  190 000 km  or  114 Months Maintenance  Service Schedule    I Change the engine oil a
96. ale indicates low engine oil pressure  If  the light turns on while driving  stop the vehicle and shut  off the engine as soon as possible  A chime will sound for  four minutes when this light turns on     Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected   This light does not show how much oil is in the engine   The engine oil level must be checked under the hood     e Charging System Light    This light shows the status of the electrical charg    ing system  If the light stays on or comes on while  driving  turn off some of the vehicle s non essential  electrical devices or increase engine speed  if at idle   If  the charging system light remains on  it means that the  vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging  system  Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY  See an autho   rized dealer        If jump starting is required  refer to    Jump Starting  Procedures    in    What To Do In Emergencies        e Electronic Throttle Control  ETC  Light     This light informs you of a problem with the  y Electronic Throttle Control  ETC  system  The  light will come on when the ignition is first  cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb  check  If the light does not come on during starting  have  the system checked by an authorized dealer     If a problem is detected  the light will come on while the  engine is running  Cycle the ignition when the vehicle  has completely stopped and the shift lever is in Neutral   with the Parking Brake applied  The light should turn off     If th
97. alified service person   nel  special tools  and equipment to perform all service  operations in an expert manner  Service Manuals are  available which include detailed service information for  your vehicle  Refer to these Service Manuals before  attempting any procedure yourself     NOTE  Intentional tampering with emissions control  systems may void your warranty and could result in civil  penalties being assessed against you     WARNING     You can be badly injured working on or around a  motor vehicle  Only do service work for which you    have the knowledge and the proper equipment  If you  have any doubt about your ability to perform a service  job  take your vehicle to a competent mechanic        NEE ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257    MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION   Continued     The pages that follow contain the required maintenance   Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids  services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your  vehicle  vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter   Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals  Do not use chemical flushes in these compo   maintenance schedule  there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine   may require servicing or replacement in the future  transmission  power steering or air conditioning   Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle  Limited Warranty  If a flush is needed because of  component malfu
98. an autho   rized dealer for service as soon as possible  If the telltale  is flashing when the engine is running  immediate service  is required  You may experience reduced performance  an  elevated  rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may  require towing   e Oil Temperature Warning Light  This telltale indicates high engine oil tempera   E ture  If the light turns on while driving  stop  RE the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as  possible  A chime will sound for four minutes  when this light turns on   e Door Ajar  T This telltale turns on when one or more doors    are ajar  The telltale will show which doors are  ajar        136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    18  Electronic Stability Control  ESC  OFF Indicator  Light     If Equipped    This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con   trol  ESC  is off     19  Electronic Stability Control  ESC  Activation   Malfunction Indicator Light     If Equipped    The    ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator  Light    in the instrument cluster will come on  when the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN  position  It should go out with the engine  running  If the    ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator  Light    comes on continuously with the engine running  a  malfunction has been detected in the ESC system  If this  light remains on after several ignition cycles  and the  vehicle has been driven several miles  kilometers  at    el  ee    speeds greater than 30 mph  48 km h   s
99. ary to turn the PAD Indicator Light on  In any case  DO  NOT assume the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is  turned off if the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated     WARNING     e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an  air bag  A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air  Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12    years or younger  including a child in a rearward  facing infant seat      Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear  seat        Flex Mat    The Flex Mat is located beneath the passenger seat  cushion foam  The Flex Mat sends signals to the OCM for  classifying the occupant in the passenger seat     Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Flex Mat  In  order for the OCS to operate as designed  it is important  for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop   erly wearing the seat belt  Properly seated passengers are     54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    e    e    e     e     Sitting upright  Facing forward    Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort   ably on or near the floor    Sitting with their back against the seat back and the  seat back in an upright position    The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if     e     e     The front passenger s weight is transferred to another  part of the vehicle  like the door  arm rest or instru   ment panel     The front passenger leans forward  sideways or turns  around    The front passenger se
100. assenger when the passenger  Advanced Front Air Bag is turned OFF  In the presence of  an occupant seated properly in the passenger seat  when  the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated  the passenger  Advanced Front Air Bag is turned OFF     The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will be enabled  for most any size adult who is seated properly in the  passenger seat  The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  may or may not be enabled for  depending on size  a  small teenager or a small adult who is seated properly in  the passenger seat  The driver and passenger should  always use the PAD Indicator Light as an indication that  the passenger is positioned properly in their seat  If the  PAD Indicator Light comes on when an adult or teenager  is in the passenger seat  have the passenger reposition  their self in the seat until the light goes out  Remember  if    NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53    the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated the passenger  Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a  collision     The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not be  enabled for most any size child who is seated properly in  the passenger seat and for most properly installed child  restraint systems  However  under certain conditions   even with a properly installed child restraint system  the  PAD Indicator Light may not be on  even though the  Advanced Front Air Bag is disabled  This can occur if the  child restraint is lighter than the threshold weight neces   s
101. at  adjust the  inside and outside mirrors  fasten your seat belt  and if  present  instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat  belt     WARNING     Long periods of engine idling  especially at high    engine speeds  can cause excessive exhaust tempera   tures  which can damage your vehicle  Do not leave  your vehicle unattended with the engine running        Normal Starting    CAUTION     Long periods of engine idling  especially at high    Never leave children alone in a vehicle  Leaving  unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a  number of reasons  A child or others could be seri     ously or fatally injured  Do not leave the key fob in engine speeds  can cause excessive exhaust tempera     tures  which can damage your vehicle  Do not leave  your vehicle unattended with the engine running     or near the vehicle  or in a location accessible to  children   and do not leave a vehicle equipped with  Keyless Enter N Go    in the ACC or ON RUN mode   A child could operate power windows  other con   trols  or move the vehicle           STARTING AND OPERATING 177    NOTE  3  Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL     You must disarm the security system in order to start 4  Press the red ENGINE START STOP button located  the engine  Refer to    Security Alarm System    in on the instrument panel  Release the button when the       Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle    for engine starts   further information     e Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine 
102. atback is not in the full upright  position      The front passenger carries or holds an object while  seated  e g   backpack  box  etc      WARNING     Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp   erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen   ger s weight accurately  This may result in serious  injury or death in a collision  Always wear your seat  belt and sit properly  with the seat back in an upright  position  your back against the seat back  sitting    upright  facing forward  in the center of the seat  with  your feet comfortably on or near the floor  Do not  carry or hold any objects  e g   backpacks  boxes  etc    while seated in the front passenger seat  Holding an  object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen   ger s weight accurately  which may result in serious  injury or death in a collision        NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55    Furthermore  objects lodged under the seat can prevent  the occupant s weight from being measured properly and  may result in the occupant being classified improperly     WARNING       Placing an object on the floor under the front  passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working    properly  which may result in serious injury or  death in a collision      Do not place any objects on the floor under the  front passenger seat     The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo   nents that affect passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  deployment  In order for the OCS to properly classify a  fro
103. attery    The top of the maintenance free battery is vented  and  must be replaced with a vented battery     The battery is located underneath an access panel inside  the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle  A  remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart   ment for jump starting  Refer to    Jump Starting Proce   dures    in    What To Do In Emergencies    for further  information     To gain access to the battery  remove the floor portion of  the rear compartment carpet     MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 261    WARNING     e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can  burn or even blind you  Do not allow battery fluid  to contact your eyes  skin  or clothing  Do not lean  over a battery when attaching clamps  If acid  splashes in eyes or on skin  flush the area imme   diately with large amounts of water      Battery gas is flammable and explosive  Keep     flame or sparks away from the battery  Do not use  a booster battery or any other booster source with  an output greater than 12 Volts  Do not allow cable  Battery Location clamps to touch each other    e Battery posts  terminals  and related accessories  contain lead and lead compounds  Wash hands  after handling        262 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    CAUTION     e It is essential when replacing the cables on the  battery that the positive cable is attached to the  positive post and the negative cable is attached to  the negative post  Battery posts are marked positive      and negative     a
104. ature is satisfactory  the coolant  bottle need only be checked once a month     When additional engine coolant  antifreeze  is needed to  maintain the proper level  only OAT coolant that meets the  reguirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106  should be added to the coolant bottle  Do not overfill     Points To Remember    NOTE  When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles   kilometers of operation  you may observe vapor coming  from the front of the engine compartment  This is nor   mally a result of moisture from rain  snow  or high  humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor   ized when the thermostat opens  allowing hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  to enter the radiator        274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    If an examination of your engine compartment shows no  evidence of radiator or hose leaks  the vehicle may be  safely driven  The vapor will soon dissipate     e    e    Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle     Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the  coolant expansion bottle  If engine coolant  antifreeze   needs to be added  the contents of the coolant expansion  bottle must also be protected against freezing     If frequent engine coolant  antifreeze  additions are  required  the cooling system should be pressure tested  for leaks     Maintain engine coolant  antifreeze  concentration at a  minimum of 50  OAT coolant  conforming to MS 12106   and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of  your engine which co
105. battery clip   located on the back cover  Avoid touching the new battery  with your fingers  Skin oils may cause battery deteriora   tion  If you touch a battery  clean it with rubbing alcohol     4  To assemble the RKE transmitter case  snap the two  halves together     General Information    This RKE transmitter complies with FCC rules Part 15   Operation is subject to the following conditions   1  This device may not cause harmful interference     2  This device must accept any interference that may be  received  including interference that may cause unde   sired operation     If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal  distance  check for these two conditions     1  Closeness to a radio transmitter  such as a radio station    tower  airport transmitter  and some mobile or CB  radios can affect transmitter operation  To verify if this  is the cause  move the vehicle to another area and test  RKE transmitter operation       The RKE transmitter may become    out of sync    and    will no longer function if operated more than 255  times while out of range of the vehicle  23 ft or 7 m  or  if operated while the vehicle battery is dead or discon   nected  To    synchronize    the RKE transmitter  cycle  the ignition to the OFF position  Close the hood and all  doors  Press both buttons on the RKE transmitter for  about 10 seconds  The horn will chirp once to ac   knowledge the signal  Normal RKE transmitter opera   tion should resume     Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
106. brake fluid reser   voir     Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may  cause leaking in the system     With disc brakes  fluid level can be expected to fall as the  brake pads wear  However  low fluid level may be caused  by a leak and a checkup may be needed     Use only the manufacturer   s recommended brake fluid   Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in     Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information  Use  of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling  point or unidentified as to specification  may result in  sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking     276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    WARNING     e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake  fluid  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine  Parts    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further  information  Using the wrong type of brake fluid    can severely damage your brake system and or  impair its performance  The proper type of brake  fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the  original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder  reservoir      Continued        WARNING   Continued       To avoid contamination from foreign matter or   moisture  use only new brake fluid or fluid that has  been in a tightly closed container  Keep the master  cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times  Brake  fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the  air resulting in a lower boiling point  This may  cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro   longed br
107. cating that the ABS is functioning     The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph   20 km h   If you have your foot lightly on the brake  while this test is occurring  you may feel slight pedal  movement  The movement can be more apparent on ice  and snow  This is normal     The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph   20 km h  and during an ABS stop  The pump motor  makes a low humming noise during operation  which is  normal     CAUTION     The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible    detrimental effects of electronic interference caused  by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele   phones           196 STARTING AND OPERATING M    WARNING     e The Anti Lock Brake System  ABS  contains so   phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus   ceptible to interference caused by improperly in   stalled or high output radio transmitting  equipment  This interference can cause possible  loss of anti lock braking capability  Installation of    such equipment should be performed by qualified  professionals    Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish  their effectiveness and may lead to a collision   Pumping makes the stopping distance longer  Just  press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to  slow down or stop     WARNING   Continued       The Anti Lock Brake System  ABS  cannot prevent  the natural laws of physics from acting on the  vehicle  nor can it increase braking or steering  efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
108. cessary   Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date  Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code  Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center             NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 305       42 000 Miles  70 000 km  or 48 000 Miles  80 000 km  or 48 Months Maintenance Service  42 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   T Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires   filter   1 Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    T Rotate tires  H Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary        T Inspect the exhaust system    H Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary    T Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary                 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                306 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses       54 000 Miles  90 000 km  or 60 000 Miles  100 000 km  or 60 Months Maintenance Service   54 Months Maintenance Schedule   Service Schedule   Q Change the engine oil and engine oil  filter       Rotate tires    11 Change the rear axle fluid     Change the engine oil and engine oil filter    Rotate tires    Replace the engine air cleaner filter    Replace the air conditioning filter 
109. cle should be requested of the  Pirelli Tire Corporation 1 800 747 3554     222 STARTING AND OPERATING    These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires   The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type  tires  Rotation will increase tread life  help to maintain  mud  snow  and wet traction levels  and contribute to a  smooth  quiet ride     Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance interval  Remember  more frequent rotation  is permissible if desired  Also  correct for anything caus   ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire  rotation     NOTE  Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres   sure sensor  The Tire Pressure Monitor System  TPMS   learns the location of each sensor though system pro   gramming  Although not required  the manufacturer  recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the  tires so that the system can relearn each sensor   s location   See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming        The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be  used in place of each other  Rotate the tires    side to side     as shown in the diagram     6 y    81f10b20    Tire Rotation       TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM  TPMS     The Tire Pressure Monitor System  TPMS  uses wireless  technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to  monitor tire pressure levels  Sensors mounted to each  wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire
110. ction  at the bottle and radiator  Inspect the entire system for  leaks     With the engine at normal operating temperature  but  not running   check the cooling system pressure cap for  proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of  engine coolant  antifreeze  from the radiator drain cock        270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE x  If the cap is sealing properly  the engine coolant  anti   freeze  will begin to drain from the coolant recovery ESAE    bottle  DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE   e Mixing of engine coolant  antifreeze  other than    CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT  specified Organic Additive Technology  OAT  en   Cooling System   Drain  Flush  And Refill gine coolant  antifreeze   may result in engine     d n   damage and may decrease corrosion protection   If the engine coolant  antifreeze  is dirty or contains Organic Additive Technology  OAT  engine cool   visible sediment  clean and flush with OAT coolant ant is different and should not be mixed with   antifreeze  that meets the requirements of Chrysler Hybrid Organic Additive Technology  HOAT  en     Material Standard MS 12106  gine coolant  antifreeze  or any    globally compat   ible    coolant  antifreeze   If a non OAT engine  coolant  antifreeze  is introduced into the cooling  system in an emergency  it should be flushed with  Selection Of Coolant OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in engine coolant  antifreeze  as soon as possib
111. ctivate the delay feature  place the ignition in the OFF  position while the headlights are still on  Then  turn off  the headlights within 45 seconds  The delay interval  begins when the headlight switch is turned off     If you turn the headlights or parking lights on  or place  the ignition in ACC or RUN  the system will cancel the  delay     If you turn the headlights off before the ignition  they will  turn off in the normal manner        90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE ed    NOTE     e The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of  placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this  feature     The headlight delay time is programmable using the  Uconnect  System  refer to    Uconnect  Settings    in     Understanding Your Instrument Panel    for further  information     Daytime Running Lights  DRL     The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when   ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position  the  headlights are off and the parking brake is off  The  headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime  driving     NOTE  If allowed by law in the country in which the  vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can  be turned on and off using the Uconnect   System  refer  to    Uconnect   Settings    in    Understanding Your Instru   ment Panel    for further information     Lights On Reminder    If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition  is placed in the OFF position  a chime will sound
112. curity    It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn  in your vehicle     To do this  press and hold the two outside buttons for 20  seconds until the red indicator flashes  Note that all  channels will be erased  Individual channels cannot be  erased     The HomeLink   Universal Transceiver is disabled when  the Vehicle Security Alarm is active     Troubleshooting Tips   If you are having trouble programming HomeLink      here are some of the most common solutions      Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit   ter     e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener  to complete the training for a Rolling Code     e Did you unplug the device for programming and  remember to plug it back in     If you have any problems  or require assistance  please  call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or  on the Internet at  www HomeLink com for information or assistance        114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE    WARNING  General Information    This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry  Canada RSS 210  Operation is subject to the following  two conditions       Your motorized door or gate will open and close  while you are programming the universal trans   ceiver  Do not program the transceiver if people   pets or other objects are in the path of the door or   1  This device may not cause harmful interference   gate  Only use this transceiver with a garage door       opener that has a  stop and reverse  fea
113. d  or absorbed  through the skin  It causes skin  eye  and respira   tory irritation  Flush immediately with plenty of  water if there is any contact with eyes or skin   Change clothing as soon as possible  if there is any  contact with clothing         Continued     240 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE    WARNING   Continued  when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and      TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex  In case of  an allergic reaction or rash  consult a physician    running the air pump  Move the vehicle as necessary to  place the valve stem in this position before proceeding     immediately  Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil    3  Place the transmission in Gear and place the ignition  dren  If swallowed  rinse mouth immediately with in the OFF position   plenty of water and drink plenty of water  Do not    4  Set the parking brake   induce vomiting  Consult a physician immediately      B  Setting Up To Use TIREFIT     peeling  A Dire Wm EEN 1  Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to the Sealant Mode   A  Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT  position        1  Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle   s 2  Uncoil the Sealant Hose  6  and then remove the cap  Hazard Warning flashers  from the fitting at the end of the hose     2  Verify that the valve stem  on the wheel with the 3  Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the  deflated tire  is in a position that is near to the ground  deflated tire   This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses  6  and  7  
114. ded flat  if  equipped   It is recommended that pets be restrained in  the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are  secured by seat belts  and cargo is properly stowed     BeltAlert   can be enabled or disabled by your autho   rized dealer  Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend  deactivating BeltAlert       NOTE  Although BeltAlert   has been deactivated  the  Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate  while the driver   s or front passenger  if equipped with  BeltAlert    seat belt remains unfastened     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41    Automatic Locking Retractor Mode  ALR      If  Equipped    In this mode  the shoulder belt is automatically pre   locked  The belt will still retract to remove any slack in  the shoulder belt  The Automatic Locking Mode is avail   able on all passenger seating positions with a combina   tion lap shoulder belt  Use the Automatic Locking Mode  anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating  position that has a belt with this feature  Children 12  years old and under should always be properly re   strained in the rear seat     How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode  1  Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt     2  Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until  the entire belt is extracted     3  Allow the belt to retract  As the belt retracts  you will  hear a clicking sound  This indicates the safety belt is  now in the Automatic Locking Mode     How To Disengage The Automatic Lock
115. ded when  possible  Damage to the power steering pump may  occur        190 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    Power Steering Fluid Check    Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined  service interval is not reguired  The fluid should only be  checked if a leak is suspected  abnormal noises are  apparent  and  or the system is not functioning as antici   pated  Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho   rized dealer     CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering    system as the chemicals can damage your power  steering components  Such damage is not covered by  the New Vehicle Limited Warranty        WARNING     Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and  with the engine off to prevent injury from moving    parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading  Do  not overfill  Use only manufacturer   s recommended  power steering fluid        If necessary  add fluid to restore to the proper indicated  level  With a clean cloth  wipe any spilled fluid from all  surfaces  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine  Parts    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further informa   tion        STARTING AND OPERATING 191    PARKING BRAKE WARNING     Before leaving the vehicle  make sure you fully apply    the parking brake and shift the transmission into  REVERSE  Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to  roll and cause damage or injury        As an added precaution when parking the vehicle  turn BE  the front wheels toward the curb on a dow
116. does  not reguire pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal   However  if the engine has not started within three  seconds  slightly press the accelerator pedal while  continuing to crank  If the engine fails to start within  15 seconds  wait five seconds  then repeat the    Normal  Starting    procedure     To Start The Engine   1  Fully apply the parking brake        2  Press the clutch pedal to the floor  Engine START STOP Button    NOTE  The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal  is pressed to the floor     178 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    If Engine Fails To Start WARNING   Continued   CAUTION  e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it    started  Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con   To prevent damage to the starter  do not crank the    verter and once the engine has started  ignite and  engine for more than 15 seconds at a time  Wait 10 to damage the converter and vehicle  If the vehicle has  15 seconds before trying again     a discharged battery  booster cables may be used to  obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in  another vehicle  This type of start can be dangerous  if done improperly  so follow this procedure care   fully  Refer to    Jump Starting    in    What To Do In  Emergencies    for further information     WARNING     e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into  the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to    start the vehicle  This could result in a flash fire
117. dress   e Owner s telephone number  home and office   e Authorized dealer name   e Vehicle Identification Number  VIN     e Vehicle delivery date and mileage    Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center  P O  Box 21 8004   Auburn Hills  MI 48321 8004   Phone   855  SRT TEAM   Chrysler Canada Inc  Customer Center  P O  Box 1621   Windsor  Ontario N9A 4H6   Phone   800  465 2001 English    800  387 9983 French  In Mexico contact    Av  Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma  1240  Sante Fe C P  05109   Mexico  D  F    In Mexico City  5081 7568   Outside Mexico City  1 800 505 1300    Ed  F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 321    Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  Impaired  TDD TTY     To assist customers who have hearing difficulties  the  manufacturer has installed special TDD  Telecommuni   cation Devices for the Deaf  equipment at its customer  center  Any hearing or speech impaired customer  who  has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter   TTY  in the United States  can communicate with the  manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY     Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require  assistance can use the special needs relay service offered  by Bell Canada  For TTY teletypewriter users  dial 711  and for Voice callers  dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with  a Bell Relay Service operator     Service Contract    You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle  to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected  repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehic
118. ds  loading  and cold tire inflation pressures     WARNING     High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi   mum load is dangerous  The added strain on your    tires could cause them to fail  You could have a  serious collision  Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the  maximum capacity at continuous speeds above  75 mph  120 km h         Radial Ply Tires    WARNING     Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires  on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle    poorly  The instability could cause a collision  Al   ways use radial ply tires in sets of four  Never  combine them with other types of tires        Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in  the tread area because of sidewall flexing  Consult your  authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs     Tire Spinning    When stuck in mud  sand  snow  or ice conditions  do not  spin your vehicle   s wheels above 30 mph  48 km h  or  for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop   ping when you are stuck     218 STARTING AND OPERATING    Refer to    Freeing A Stuck Vehicle    in    What To Do In  Emergencies    for further information     WARNING     Fast spinning tires can be dangerous  Forces gener   ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam   age or failure  A tire could explode and injure some     one  Do not spin your vehicle   s wheels faster than  30 mph  48 km h  for more than 30 seconds continu   ously when you are stuck  and do not let anyone near  a spinning wheel  no 
119. e   2  Press the ignition switch to the ON RUN position     Air Conditioner Maintenance    For best possible performance  your air conditioner  should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer  at the start of each warm season  This service should  include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance  test  Drive belt tension should also be checked at this  time     CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning    system as the chemicals can damage your air condi   tioning components  Such damage is not covered by  the New Vehicle Limited Warranty        264 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    WARNING     e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants  approved by the manufacturer for your air condi   tioning system  Some unapproved refrigerants are  flammable and can explode  injuring you  Other  unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the  system to fail  requiring costly repairs  Refer to    Warranty Information Book  located on the DVD   for further warranty information    The air conditioning system contains refrigerant  under high pressure  To avoid risk of personal  injury or damage to the system  adding refrigerant  or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected  should be done by an experienced technician        Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling    R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro   carbon  HFC  that is endorsed by the Environmental  Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product  How   ever  the manufacturer
120. e   I Change the engine oil and engine oil  filter    11 Rotate tires    T Replace the engine air cleaner filter    I Flush and replace the engine coolant   at 150 000 miles  250 000 km  or 120   months whichever comes first    Q Adjust parking brake on vehicles  equipped with four wheel disc                brakes   Odometer Reading Date  Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center          316 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se      This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer  to the owner  but is not reguired to maintain emissions  warranty     WARNING       You can be badly injured working on or around a  motor vehicle  Do only service work for which you  have the knowledge and the right equipment  If  you have any doubt about your ability to perform a    service job  take your vehicle to a competent me   chanic    e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve   hicle could result in a component malfunction and  effect vehicle handling and performance  This  could cause an accident           IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE                                                                   CONTENTS  ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  FOR YOUR VEHICLE        ees e Na 319 Impaired  TDD TTY   s rrari pua EE Ee ee 321  Prepare For The Appointment              319 Service Contract ss eae ae eae ee 321  Prepare  A List  sse cope RR RE 319 B WARRANTY INFORMATION               322  Be Reasonable With Re
121. e Hag red TEE ges 273  Points to Remember              lessen 273  Pressure Cape sesiet tentait IR BEBE Da us 272  Radiator  Cap    sacs dose pec Fo ER RC PRX S 272  Selection of Coolant  Antifreeze                 270  Corrosion Protection           llle esee 279    Cruise Light  ou Me RR ruis seas ac m ics 133  Cupholder   x Esc Rue Bea ger Rek DOER n ug vds 117  Customer Assistance        lille 319  Data Recorder  Event       SS SS ss 59  Daytime Brightness  Interior Lights               94  Daytime Running Lights                      90  Dealer Service  si ergeren rari ES es 256  Defroster  Rear Window        SS SS SS se 121  Defroster  Windshield        SS 70  Delay  Intermittent  Wipers                 04   95  Diagnostic System  Onboard                   254  Dimmer Switch  Headlight                     91  Dipsticks   Power Steering   i ces em RR RR mi 190  Disposal   Antifreeze  Engine Coolant                   273  Door Locks st Ee RS RD Ee eS ane ee e 25    Door Locks  Automatic       SE SE ss 27    NEE INDEX 331    Door Opener  Garage  e cessa iess awia Uei anes 106  DOTS P 25  Driving   Through Flowing  Rising  or Shallow Standing   Walete acie ae WE ene Se Rabe 187  Electrical Outlet  Auxiliary  Power Outlet          115  Electric Remote Mirrors                  0004 78  Electronic Brake Control System              Ls  197   Traction Control System      aaas auses ee 198  Electronic Speed Control  Cruise Control           101  Electronic Stability Control  ESC  
122. e How far  if at all  the driver was depressing the  accelerator and or brake pedal  and     e How fast the vehicle was traveling     These data can help provide a better understanding of  the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur     NOTE  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a  non trivial crash situation occurs  no data are recorded by  the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per   sonal data  e g   name  gender  age  and crash location   are recorded  However  other parties  such as law en   forcement  could combine the EDR data with the type of  personally identifying data routinely acquired during a  crash investigation     To read data recorded by an EDR  special equipment is  required  and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed     In addition to the vehicle manufacturer  other parties   such as law enforcement  that have the special equip   ment  can read the information if they have access to the  vehicle or the EDR     Child Restraints    Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the  time  including babies and children  Every state in the  United States and all Canadian provinces require small  children ride in proper restraint systems  This is the law   and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it     WARNING     In a collision  an unrestrained child can become a    projectile inside the vehicle  The force required to  hold even an infant on your lap could become so  great that you could not hold the child  no matter        
123. e bulb check  if the driver s  seat belt is unbuckled  a chime will sound  After the bulb    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127    check or when driving  if the driver s seat belt remains  unbuckled  the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate  and the chime will sound  Refer to    Occupant Restraints     in  Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle  for  further information     4  Turn Signal Indicators    The arrow will flash with the exterior turn  signal when the turn signal lever is operated     If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven  more than 1 mile  1 6 km  with either turn signal on  a  continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the  signals off  If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate  check  for a defective outside light bulb     Both turn signal arrows will flash in unison with the  front and rear turn signals when the HAZARD  WARNING button is operated     128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    NOTE  Leaving the hazard flashers on for extended  periods will wear down the battery     5  High Beam Indicator     Z  This indicator shows that the high beam head    lights are on  Push the multifunction lever for   ward to switch the headlights to high beam  and pull  toward yourself  normal position  to return to low beam     6  EVIC Menu Set  Selectable ICONS   The EVIC displays are located In the center portion of the  cluster and consists of eight section    e Speedometer  Digital or Anal
124. e driver door is opened   3  The doors were not previously unlocked   Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming    To change the current setting  refer to    Uconnect  Set   tings  in  Understanding Your Instrument Panel  for  further information     NOTE  Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature  in accordance with local laws     28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    WINDOWS There are single window controls on the passenger door  trim panel  which operate the passenger door window   The window controls will operate only when the ignition  The window controls on the driver s door control both of is in the ACC or ON RUN position    the door windows     Power Windows    The power window switches will remain active for up to  10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position   Opening either front door will cancel this feature  The  time is programmable  Refer to    Uconnect  Access Set   tings    in    Understanding Your Instrument Panel    for  further information     WARNING     Never leave children unattended in a vehicle  and do    not let children play with power windows  Do not  leave the key fob in or near the vehicle  and do not    leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go          Power Window Switches   Continued     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29    WARNING   Continued     in the ACC or ON RUN mode  Occupants  particu   larly unattended children  can become entrapped by    the wind
125. e engine is running before  turning ON the TIREFIT kit     3  The Sealant Bottle  1  may be empty due to previous    use  Call for assistance        242 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEE ed    NOTE  If the Mode Select Knob  5  is on Air Mode and  the pump is operating  air will dispense from the Air  Pump Hose  7  only  not the Sealant Hose  6      If the sealant  white fluid  does flow through the  Sealant Hose  6      1     Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no  longer flowing through hose  typically takes 30   70  seconds   As the sealant flows through the Sealant  Hose  6   the Pressure Gauge  3  can read as high as 70  psi  5 Bar  The Pressure Gauge  3  will decrease  quickly from approximately 70 psi  5 Bar  to the actual  tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle  1  is empty       The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi     ately after the Sealant Bottle  1  is empty  Continue to  operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure  indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side  latch pillar  recommended pressure   Check the tire  pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge  3      If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi  1 8 Bar   pressure within 15 minutes       The tire is too badly damaged  Do not attempt to drive  the vehicle further  Call for assistance     NOTE  If the tire becomes over inflated  press the Defla   tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom   mended inflation pressure before co
126. e has not  been driven for at least three hours  or driven less than 1  mile  1 6 km  after a three hour period  The cold tire  inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla   tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall     Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  of outdoor temperatures  as tire pressures vary with  temperature changes     Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi  7 kPa  per  12  F  7  C  of air temperature change  Keep this in mind  when checking tire pressure inside a garage  especially in  the winter     Example  If garage temperature   68  F  20  C  and the  outside temperature   32  F  0  C  then the cold tire  inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi  21 kPa    which equals 1 psi  7 kPa  for every 12  F  7  C  for this  outside temperature condition     Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi  13 to 40 kPa   during operation  DO NOT reduce this normal pressure  build up or your tire pressure will be too low     Ed STARTING AND OPERATING 217    Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation    The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds  within posted speed limits  Where speed limits or condi   tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  speeds  maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very  important  Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle  loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera   tion  Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire  dealer for recommended safe operating spee
127. e is   a tether strap anchor located behind the child tether  access cover behind the passenger seat           022671 501    Child Tether Access Cover    THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65       F 022671502    Bay    Child Tether Tether Hook    NOTE  While the child tether is in use  keep the access 6  Move the seat to its farthest rearward position  Apply  cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters  the child tether  have latched     4  Pass the child restraint tether hook through either 7  Return the seatback to an upright position   opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint     5  Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop     66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE ed    8     Install the child restraint according to the manufactur   er   s directions       Remove slack from the tether strap according to the  child restraint manufacturer   s directions     WARNING     An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  increased head motion and possible injury to the    child  Use only the anchor position directly behind  the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether  strap        Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat  belt    The passenger seat belt is equipped with an automatic  locking retractor for child restraint system installation  It is  designed to keep the lap portion of the restraint held tightly  to the passe
128. e light remains lit with the engine running  your  vehicle will usually be drivable  However  see an autho   rized dealer for service as soon as possible  If the light is  flashing when the engine is running  immediate service is    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145    required  You may experience reduced performance  an  elevated  rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may  require towing     e Engine Temperature Warning Light     _ This light warns of an overheated engine condi   tion  As temperatures rise and the gauge ap   proaches H  this indicator will illuminate and a single  chime will sound after reaching a set threshold  Further  overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H   the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous  chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool     If the light turns on while driving  safely pull over and  stop the vehicle  If the A C system is on  turn it off  Also   shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve   hicle  If the temperature reading does not return to  normal  turn the engine off immediately and call for  service  Refer to  If Your Engine Overheats  in  What To  Do In Emergencies  for more information     146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  EVIC Green Telltales  e Electronic Speed Control SET   This telltale will illuminate green when the elec   O tronic speed control is SET  For further informa     tion  refer to    Electronic Speed Control    in    Un   derstanding The Features 
129. e stays on or comes  on while driving  turn off some of the vehicle   s non   essential electrical devices or increase engine speed  if at  idle   If the charging system telltale remains on  it means  that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the  charging system  Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY  See  an authorized dealer            If jump starting is required  refer to    Jump Starting  Procedures    in    What To Do In Emergencies        NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135      Oil Pressure Warning  Qr  This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure  If  the light turns on while driving  stop the vehicle  and shut off the engine as soon as possible  A chime will  sound for four minutes when this light turns on     Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected   This light does not show how much oil is in the engine   The engine oil level must be checked under the hood   e Electronic Throttle Control  ETC   This telltale informs you of a problem with the  x Electronic Throttle Control  ETC  system  If the  telltale comes on while driving  have the sys   tem checked by an authorized dealer     If a problem is detected  the telltale will come on while  the engine is running  Cycle the ignition when the vehicle  has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in  the NEUTRAL position and the parking brake applied   The telltale should turn off     If the telltale remains lit with the engine running  your  vehicle will usually be drivable  However  see 
130. e sva dom cae BE BAR RE Bu 293    Bulbs  Light  coder Ste GE ER bag 71    Camera  Reaf   uu dede ve RE REG Ge A ee ee eds 104  Capacities  Antifreeze  Engine Coolant            295  Capacities  Fluid ee resce gee erre es 295  Caps  Filler   Oil  Engine    aree Ee Re eri ie ie EE ED EE 258   Power Steering  idera eunt dero Palais deus 190   Radiator  Coolant Pressure                   272  Carbon Monoxide Warning                 04   68  Car Washes  six ease ues Siete OE A E te Ps 279  Cellular Phone       0 0 0    ccc ee 165  Chains  ites 4221252  oa BR ee REG OY eR ES 221  Chart  Tire Sizing   sss se ah 204  Check Engine Light  Malfunction Indicator Light     132  Checking Your Vehicle For Safety                68  Checks  Safety   e Sacs bee e kd RERO URP  Child Restramit   4 2 Rr EE REED AE Te  Child Restraint Tether Anchors  Clean Air Gasoline             llle        330 INDEX ee    Cleaning  Wheels ie RE ale Be gs ER ale RD Rem dnd 280  Windshield Wiper Blades                   265  Climate Control   eR Ba de EE RR UR Kgs 165  Clutch Fluid  ii c WRK ete E LR de 278  Contract  Service  ssa  ahs n RE br EE RR Ar Pea 321  Coolant Pressure Cap  Radiator Cap              272  Cooling Systems   ssa oye ede Gee ER 269  Adding Coolant  Antifreeze              00  271  Coolant Capacity    6 6    enpi ea EE eee 295  Coolant bevel sa 4 dashed tea ed doe sees 269  Disposal of Used Coolant                    273  Drain  Flush  and Refill                Ls  270  lnsp  ctiot  AE tae he
131. ease the button       Without releasing the button proceed with  Program     ming A Rolling Code  Step 2 and follow all remaining  steps     Programming A Non Rolling Code    For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured  before 1995     L    Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm     away from the HomeLink   button you wish to pro   gram while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in  view       Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink      button you want to program and the hand held trans   mitter button       Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi     cator light  HomeLink   indicator will flash slowly  and then rapidly after HomeLink   has received the  frequency signal from the hand held transmitter  Re   lease both buttons after the indicator light changes  from slow to rapid       Press and hold the programmed HomeLink   button    and observe the indicator light    e If the indicator light stays on constantly  program   ming is complete and the garage door device should  activate when the HomeLink   button is pressed     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111    e To program the remaining two HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the channels     Reprogramming A Single HomeLink   Button    To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps     1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Press and h
132. eat is in the desired  position  Then  using body pressure  move forward and    e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area  inside or r  rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters    outside of a vehicle  In a collision  people riding in  these areas are more likely to be seriously injured   have latched   or killed     e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat  belts  In a collision  people riding in these areas are  more likely to be seriously injured or killed    e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  using a seat belt properly        NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81    a     Seat Adjustment Bar       030971472    Seat Height Adjustment    The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out   board side of the seat  Pull upward on the lever to raise  the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower  the seat height        f 030971471    Height Adjustment Lever    82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEE ed  Recliner Adjustment    The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the  seat  To recline the seat  lean forward slightly  pull the  recliner lever upward  lean backward until the seat is in  the desired position  and release the lever  To return the  seat to its full upright position  lean forward  pull the  recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to  its full upright position     dm    Recline Lever     
133. econd power outlet is located between the seat  backs above the cup holders  This power outlet is con   nected directly by the battery and powered at all times     116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEE    WARNING     To avoid serious injury or death      Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet  should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet      Do not touch with wet hands       Close the lid when not in use and while driving the  vehicle    e If this outlet is mishandled  it may cause an electric  shock and failure        NOTE  Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts   13 Amps  at 12 Volts  If the 160 Watt  13 Amp  power  rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will  need to be replaced     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117    CAUTION  CUPHOLDERS     If Equipped    There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center  console     e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw  power from the vehicle   s battery  even when not in  use  i e  cellular phones  etc    Eventually  if  plugged in long enough  the vehicle   s battery will  discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or  prevent the engine from starting    e Accessories that draw higher power  i e   coolers   vacuum cleaners  lights  etc   will degrade the bat   tery even more quickly  Only use these intermit   tently and with greater caution    e After the use of high power draw accessories  or  long periods of the vehicle not
134. ected using either hard heys or soft keys  as follows     Hard key    The blower speed increases as you tum the control  clockwise from the lowest blower setting  The blower  Speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise     Soft key    Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting  and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting   Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar  area between the icons     8  Climate Control OFF Button    Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control  ON OFF     9  Temperature Control Down Button   Push the button for cooler temperature settings   10  Temperature Control Up Button   Push the button for warmer temperature settings   Automatic Operation    1  Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button on the  Automatic Temperature Control  ATC  Panel     2  Next  adjust the temperature you would like the  system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas   senger temperature hard or soft control buttons  Once  the desired temperature is displayed  the system will  achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level     170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    3  When the system is set up for your comfort level  it is  not necessary to change the settings  You will experi   ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the  system to function automatically     NOTE     e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for  cold or hot vehicles  The syst
135. ed on the vehicle  That weight may not  safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load  capacity calculated in Step 4       If your vehicle will be towing a trailer  load from your    trailer will be transferred to your vehicle  Consult this  manual to determine how this reduces the available  cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle        212 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN    NOTE     e The following table shows examples on how to calcu   late total load  cargo luggage  and towing capacities  of your vehicle with varying seating configurations  and number and size of occupants  This table is for  illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for  the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle     e    For the following example  the combined weight of  occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs   392 kg      TOTAL   FRONT   REAR    EXAMPLE 1       Combined weight of  occupants and cargo  from Tire Placard    865 Ibs    865 Ibs    MINUS    minus    minus       Combined Occupant s  weight    Occupant 1  200 Ibs    Occupant 1  210 Ibs   Occupant 2  180 Ibs    Occupant 3  150 tbs  TOTAL WEIGHT  540 ibs    540 Ibs  Occupant 1  200 Ibs    Occupant 2  200 Ibs  TOTAL WEIGHT  400 Ibs    400 Ibs       STARTING AND OPERATING 213    AVAILABLE  Cargo Luggage and  Trailer Tongue  Weight    195 Ibs    325 Ibs    465 Ibs    811a4d11       214 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    WARNING  Safety  WARNING     Overloading of your tires is dangerous  Overloading  can cause tire
136. ee an on screen  image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever  the shift lever is put into REVERSE  The image will be  displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a  caution note to    check entire surroundings    across the  top of the screen  After five seconds  this note will  disappear  The ParkView  camera is located on the rear  of the vehicle above the rear License plate  To make your  selection  touch the ParkView  Backup Camera soft key   until a check mark appears next to setting  showing that  setting has been selected  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu     Lights    After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings  will be available     e Headlight Illumination On Approach    When this feature is selected  the headlights will activate  and remain on for 0  30  60  or 90 seconds when the doors  are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry  RKE   transmitter  To change the Illuminated Approach status   touch the   or   soft key to select your desired time  interval  Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the  previous menu     e Headlights With Wipers     If Equipped    When this feature is selected  and the headlight switch is  in the AUTO position  the headlights will turn on ap   proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on   The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are  turned off if they were turned on by this feature  To make       158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNN
137. ee your autho   rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem  diagnosed and corrected     NOTE     e The    ESC Off Indicator Light    and the    ESC  Activation Malfunction Indicator Light    come on  momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to  ON RUN     e Each time the ignition is cycled to ON RUN  the  ESC system will be ON  even if it was turned off  previously     e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  sounds when it is active  This is normal  the sounds  will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the  maneuver that caused the ESC activation        20  Anti Lock Brake  ABS  Light     es    If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving  it  indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system  is not functioning and that service is reguired  However   the conventional brake system will continue to operate  normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on     This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System   ABS   The light will tum on when the ignition  is cycled to the ON RUN position and may  stay on for as long as four seconds     UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137  If the ABS light is on  the brake system should be serviced  as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock  brakes  If the ABS light does not turn on when the  ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position  have the light  inspected by an authorized dealer     21  Park Headlight ON Indicator     If Equipped    _ This indicator will illuminate when the park    li
138. em automatically adjusts  the temperature  mode  and blower speed to provide  comfort as quickly as possible     e The temperature can be displayed in U S  or Metric  units by selecting the US M customer programmable  feature  Refer to the    Uconnect   Access System Set   tings    in this section of the manual     To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic  mode  during cold start ups the blower fan will remain  on low until the engine warms up  The blower will  increase in speed and transition into Auto mode     Recirculation Control    When outside air contains smoke  odors  or high humid   ity  or if rapid cooling is desired  you may wish to  recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION  control button  Recirculation mode should only be used  temporarily  The recirculation LED will illuminate on the  blower control knob when this button is selected  Push  the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation  mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle     NOTE  In cold weather  use of Recirculation mode may  lead to excessive window fogging  The Recirculation  mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window  clearing operation  Recirculation will be disabled auto   matically if these modes are selected     Summer Operation    The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles  must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant  to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171    a
139. en a door is opened     To protect the battery  the interior lights will turn off  automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to  the LOCK position  This will occur if the interior lights  were switched on manually or are on because a door is  open  This includes the glove box light  but not the trunk  light  To restore interior light operation  either turn the  ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch           Dimmer Controls    The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is  located on the left side of the instrument panel     031471322    Dimmer Controls       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 98    With the parking lights or headlights on  rotating the left The right dimmer control adjusts the ambient light for  dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the the interior door release handles   instrument panel lights and turn on the courtesy lights        031471321    031471320       Right Dimmer Control  Left Dimmer Control    94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEE ed  Interior Light Control Interior Light Defeat  OFF     Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF  second detent to turn on the interior lights  The interior position  The interior lights will remain off when the  lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this doors are open     poe Parade Mode  Daytime Brightness Feature        Rotate the dimmer control
140. ensioners to enhance occu   pant protection by managing occupant energy during  an impact event     if equipped      Passenger side seatbelt incorporates an Automatic  Locking Retractor  ALR   which locks the seat belt  webbing into position by extending the belt all the way    out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to  restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat      if equipped    If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized  seat belts  the seat belts or tether anchor feature also can  be used to hold infant and child restraint systems  For  more information on the tether anchor  refer to Child  Restraint Tether Anchor     NOTE  The Advanced Front Air bags have a multistage  inflator design  This allows the air bag to have different  rates of inflation based on several factors  including the  severity and type of collision     Please pay close attention to the information in this  section  It tells you how to use your restraint system  properly  to keep you and your passengers as safe as  possible     34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    WARNING     In a collision  you and your passengers can suffer  much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled    up  You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other  passengers  or You can be thrown out of the vehicle   Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are  buckled up properly     Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver  
141. ent panel could mean you won t have the air bags  to protect you in a collision  If the light does not come    on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned  on  stays on after you start the vehicle  or if it comes  on as you drive  have an authorized dealer service the  air bag system immediately        Driver Air Bag Passenger Air Bag Inflator Units    The Driver Air Bag Inflator Unit is mounted in the  steering wheel  The Passenger Air Bag Inflator Unit is  mounted underneath a cover in the passenger side of the  instrument panel  When the ORC detects a collision  requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags  it signals the  inflator units  A large quantity of non toxic gas is gener   ated to inflate the Air Bags  Different Air Bag inflation  rates may be possible based on several factors  including    collision type  severity and occupant size  The steering  wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the  instrument panel separate and then fold out of the way   as the Air Bags inflate to their full size  The Air Bags  inflate fully in about 50 to 70 ms  This is about half of the  time it takes to blink your eyes  The Air Bags then deflate  quickly while helping to restrain the driver and passen   ger  The Air Bag gas is vented toward the instrument  panel through vent holes in the Air Bag material  In this  way  the Air Bags do not interfere with your control of the  vehicle     Occupant Classification Module  OCM     The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety 
142. er     3  If any doors are open  close them   Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed    NOTE  Using the key to open the liftgate while the  Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm     Press the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmit   ter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or  having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm  Then   within 30 seconds  open the liftgate by using the key  cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in the  exterior liftgate handle     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19    To Disarm The System    The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of  the following methods       Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless  Entry  RKE  transmitter       Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF  position     Press the Keyless Enter N Go    Start Stop button   requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle    NOTE       The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the  Vehicle Security Alarm     e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed  the interior  power door lock switches will not unlock the doors     The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your  vehicle  however  you can create conditions where the    system will give you a false alarm  If one of the previ   ously described arming sequences has occurred  the  Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether  you are in the vehicle or not  If you remain in the vehicle  and open a door  the alarm will sound 
143. erform   exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts    the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual       For long term storage  remove the tires and put the  vehicle up on blocks  Stack the tires on plywood and  cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting        292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    e Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure flashes  the system is operating properly  If not  there  that the voltage is above 12 40 Volts  The voltage will is a problem with a switch or the system  See your  drop more rapidly in hot temperatures  If battery authorized dealer for service     voltage drops below 12 40 Volts  follow the battery      e Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci   recharge procedure in the Service Manual  P P    dental damage to the finish   NOTE  To help prevent the battery from discharging    during shorter periods of inactivity  perform the following  REPLACEMENT BULBS    1  Make sure that the liftgate  hood  doors  windows Interior Bulbs  are completely closed        Bulb Number          2  Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry  RKE  trans  Message Center Indica  108  mitter is operating and that the battery is good  tors   3  Make sure that the HOOD  LIFIGATE  and DOOR   Cluster 103  switches are in adjustment  Perform the quick system Gauge Pack 103  check  which follows  Use the remote transmitter to Heater Control 37       t the alarm  If the alarm SET light d  S MN sem comes on and Interior Lamp LED  Serviced at    A
144. ergency warning system and it should not  be used when the vehicle is in motion  Use it when your  vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for  other motorists     When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance  the  Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even  though the ignition is placed in the OFF position     NOTE  With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher  may wear down your battery     IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS    In any of the following situations  you can reduce the  potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac   tion       On the highways     Slow down and use the highest  gear possible       In city traffic     While stopped  put the transmission  in NEUTRAL  but do not increase engine idle speed       In city traffic     While moving  shift into the highest  gear possible to reduce engine RPM     NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 235    NOTE  There are steps that you can take to slow down  an impending overheat condition     e If your air conditioner  A C  is on  turn it off  The A C  system adds heat to the engine cooling system and  turning the A C off can help remove this heat     e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum  heat  the mode control to floor and the blower control  to high  This allows the heater core to act as a  supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  from the engine cooling system     WARNING     You or others can be badly burned by hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  or steam from your
145. ermit exhaust fumes  to seep into the passenger compartment  In addition   inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised  for lubrication or oil change  Replace as required     Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The  Vehicle    Seat Belts    Inspect the belt system periodically  checking for cuts   frays  and loose parts  Damaged parts must be replaced  immediately  Do not disassemble or modify the system        70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE ed    Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a  collision  Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after  a collision if they have been damaged  i e   bent retractor   torn webbing  etc    If there is any question regarding belt  or retractor condition  replace the belt     Air Bag Warning Light    The light should come on and remain on for four to eight  seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled  to ON  If the light is not lit during starting  see your  authorized dealer  If the light stays on  flickers  or comes  on while driving  have the system checked by an autho   rized dealer     Defroster    Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place  the blower control on high speed  You should be able to  feel the air directed against the windshield  See your  authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper   able     Floor Mat Safety Information    Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of  your vehicle  Use only floor ma
146. es    When the appropriate conditions occur  this type of  message takes control of the main display area for five  seconds and then returns to the previous screen  Most of  the messages of this type are then stored  as long as the  condition that activated it remains active  and can be  reviewed from the  Messages  main menu item  As long  as there is a stored message  an  i  will be displayed in  the EVIC s compass outside temp line  Examples of this  message type are  Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out   and  Low Tire Pressure         142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE    e Unstored Messages    This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the  condition that activated the message is cleared  Examples  of this message type are    Turn Signal On   if a turn signal  is left on  and  Lights On   if driver leaves the vehicle      e Five Second Unstored Messages    When the appropriate conditions occur  this type of  message takes control of the main display area for five  seconds and then returns to the previous screen  An  example of this message type is  Automatic High Beams  On      Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Messages    e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled  e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled  e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled    Key Fob Battery Low   Service Airbag System   ESC Status   Oil Pressure Low   Fuel Low   Service Antilock Brake System  Service Electronic Throttle Control  Cruise Off   Cruise Ready   Cruise Set To XXX MP
147. ess and  release to select  Refer to    Automatic Operation    for more  information  Performing this function will cause the ATC to  switch between manual mode and automatic modes     NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167    4  Front Defrost Button    Press and release to change the current airflow setting to  Defrost mode  The indicator illuminates when this fea   ture is ON  Performing this function will cause the ATC  to switch into manual mode  The blower speed may  increase when Defrost mode is selected  If the front  defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return  the previous setting     5  Rear Defrost Button    Press and release this button to turn on the rear window  defroster and the heated outside mirrors  if equipped    An indicator will illuminate when the rear window  defroster is on  The rear window defroster automatically  turns off after 10 minutes     CAUTION     Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to   the heating elements    e Use care when washing the inside of the rear  window  Do not use abrasive window cleaners on  the interior surface of the window  Use a soft cloth    and a mild washing solution  wiping parallel to the  heating elements  Labels can be peeled off after  soaking with warm water      Do not use scrapers  sharp instruments  or abrasive  window cleaners on the interior surface of the  window    e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window        168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME    6  Modes 
148. essure values still shown  This indicates that the pres   sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors  but they may not be located in the correct vehicle  position  The system still needs to be serviced as long as  the  SERVICE TPM SYSTEM  message is displayed        FUEL REGUIREMENTS  8 4L Engine    The 8 4L engine is designed to meet all  emissions regulations and provide excellent  fuel economy and performance when using  high quality premium unleaded gasoline  909095  with an octane rating of 91 or higher        Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  your engine  However  continued heavy spark knock at  high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is  required     Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  starting  stalling  and hesitations  If you experience these  symptoms  try another brand of  premium  gasoline  before considering service for the vehicle     STARTING AND OPERATING 225    Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world  have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica   tions  the World Wide Fuel Charter  WWFC  which  define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced  emissions  engine performance  and durability for your  vehicle  The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso   lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are  available     Reformulated Gasoline    Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  burning gasoline referred to as    Reformulated Gasoline      Reformula
149. even  on short trips  Someone on the road may be a poor driver  and cause an collision that includes you  This can happen  far away from home or on your own street     Research has shown that seat belts save lives  and they  can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an collision   Some of the worst injuries happen when people are  thrown from the vehicle  Seat belts reduce the possibility       of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the  inside of the vehicle  Everyone in a motor vehicle should  be belted at all times     Lap Shoulder Belts    Each seat belt is a combined lap shoulder belt system   The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very  sudden stops or impacts  This feature allows the shoulder  portion of the belt to move freely with you under normal  conditions  However  in an collision  the belt will lock  and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle  or being thrown out of the vehicle     en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35    WARNING  WARNING   Continued       Wearing your belt in the wrong place can make  your injuries in a collision much worse  You might  suffer internal injuries  or you could even slide out  of part of the belt  Follow these instructions wear  you seat belt safely and to keep your passengers  safe  too     e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area   inside or outside of a vehicle  In a collision  people  riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  injured or killed      Do 
150. example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half  times as well on the government course as a tire graded  100  The relative performance of tires depends upon the  actual conditions of their use  however  and may depart    significantly from the norm due to variations in driving  habits  service practices  and differences in road charac   teristics and climate     Traction Grades    The Traction grades  from highest to lowest  are AA  A  B   and C  These grades represent the tire   s ability to stop on  wet pavement  as measured under controlled conditions  on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and  concrete  A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor   mance     WARNING     The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on    straight ahead braking traction tests  and does not  include acceleration  cornering  hydroplaning  or  peak traction characteristics        326 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE BENE    Temperature Grades    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire   s resistance to the generation of heat  and its ability to dissipate heat  when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  test wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life  and  excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure  The  grade C corresponds to a level of performance  which all  passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor  Vehicle Safety 
151. f 15 mph   24 km h  or greater     NOTE  The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the  ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while  the Panic Alarm is activated  However  the exterior lights  and horn will remain on     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23    Programming Additional Transmitters    Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be  performed at an authorized dealer     Transmitter Battery Replacement    The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032  battery     NOTE       Perchlorate Material     special handling may apply   See www dtsc ca gov   hazardouswaste perchlorate    Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back  housing or the printed circuit board            Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical  latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways  with your thumb and then pull the key out with your  other hand     2  Insert the tip of the emergency key or a  2 flat blade  screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves  of the RKE transmitter apart  Make sure not to damage  the seal during removal        021337430    Emergency Key Removal    24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    3  Remove the battery by turning the back cover over   battery facing downward  and tapping it lightly on a  solid surface such as a table or similar  then replace the  battery  When replacing the battery  match the   sign on  the battery to the   sign on the inside of the 
152. f the Climate Controls in the center of the instru   ment panel  Turn the control knob to scroll through    menus and change settings  ie   30  60  90   press the  center of the control knob one or more times to select or  change a setting  i e   ON  OFF      Soft Keys   Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect  Access dis   play    Customer Programmable Features     Uconnect amp   Access System Settings    Press the Apps soft key  then press the Settings soft key  to display the menu setting screen  In this mode the  Uconnect  Access system allows you to access program   mable features that may be equipped such as Display   Clock  Safety Assistance  Lights  Doors  amp  Locks   Auto On Comfort  Engine Off Operation  Compass Set   tings  Audio  Phone Bluetooth and SiriusXM Setup     NOTE  Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a  time     154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    When making a selection  press the soft key to enter the  desired mode  Once in the desired mode press and release  the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the  setting  showing that setting has been selected     Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to  close out of the settings screen  Pressing the Up or Down  Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow  you to toggle up or down through the available settings     Display   After pressing the Display 
153. first gear to  fourth gear  After you shift the transmission into fourth  gear  you can press the clutch in and shift to another  forward gear     Skip uc m    Shift  O     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 183    Downshifting   Proper downshifting will improve fuel  economy and prolong engine life     To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life  down   shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep  grade     CAUTION     If you skip more than one gear while downshifting    or downshift at too high a vehicle speed  you could  damage the engine  transmission  or clutch     WARNING     Skipping more than one gear while downshifting        could cause you to lose control of your vehicle  You  could have a collision        STREET RACE MODE   IF EQUIPPED    This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled  damping system  This system allows for a street suspen   sion damping setting or a firmer race suspension damp   ing setting  When in street mode the system automati   cally shifts the suspension dampers to the firmer Race  damping setting during some hard acceleration and  braking situations  The system also reduces body roll and  pitch in many driving situations including acceleration  and braking  There are two modes of operation     NOTE  With the ignition in the ON RUN position  the  suspension damping system will be in the last mode the  system was in when the vehicle was turned off  The  driver can select either Street or Race damping mode at  any time     e St
154. g system immediately     e   ry    e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during  the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first  cycled to the ON RUN position     The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to  eight second interval     e    The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or  remains on while driving     NOTE  If the speedometer  tachometer  or any engine  related gauges are not working  the Occupant Restraint  Controller  ORC  may also be disabled  The Air Bags may  not be ready to inflate for your protection  Promptly check  the fuse block for blown fuses  Refer to the label located on  the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper Air Bag  fuses  See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good     Event Data Recorder  EDR     This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder   EDR   The main purpose of an EDR is to record  in  certain crash or near crash like situations  such as an air  bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle  data that will  assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per   formed  The EDR is designed to record data related to  vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of  time  typically 30 seconds or less  The EDR in this vehicle  is designed to record such data as     e How various systems in your vehicle were operating        60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEE ed    e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts  were buckled fastened     
155. gainst engine overheating  A solution of 50  ethylene  glycol antifreeze coolant and 50  water is recommended   Refer to    Maintenance Procedures    in    Maintaining Your  Vehicle    for proper coolant selection     Winter Operation    To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor   mance  make sure the engine cooling system is function   ing properly and the proper amount  type  and concen   tration of coolant is used  Refer to    Maintenance  Procedures    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for proper  coolant selection  Use of the air Recirculation mode  during Winter months is not recommended because it  may cause window fogging     Vacation Storage    Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service   i e   vacation  for two weeks or more  run the air  conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in  fresh air with the blower setting in high  This will ensure    adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility  of compressor damage when the system is started again     Window Fogging and Frosting    Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in  mild  rainy and or humid weather  Windows may frost  on the inside of the glass in very cold weather  To clear  the windows  select Defrost or Mix mode and increase  the front blower speed  Do not use the Recirculation  mode without A C for long periods  as fogging may  occur     Outside Air Intake    Make sure the air intake  located directly in front of the  windshield  is free of obs
156. ghts or headlights are turned on           00    138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful   EVIC  information by pressing the switches mounted on the  steering wheel  The EVIC consists of the following     e Digital Speedometer  e SRT Performance Info  Vehicle Info    Y      Fuel Economy Info  e Trip A   e Trip B   e Radio Info    040971548    Stored Messages  The Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  fea   tures a driver interactive display that is located in the  instrument cluster    Diagnostic Codes       e Screen Setup    e Vehicle Hibernation Settings       e Vehicle Settings    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139  e LIP Arrow Button    The system allows the driver to select information by A  Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll  pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering upward through the main menu and sub   wheel  menus  Fuel Economy  Trip A  Trip B  Audio        EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons    Stored Messages  Screen Set Up    e DOWN Arrow Button    Press and release the DOWN arrow button to  V scroll downward through the main menu and   sub menus  Fuel Economy  lrip A  Trip B    Audio  Stored Messages  Screen Set Up      e RIGHT Arrow Button    Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to   gt  access select the information screens or sub   menu screens of a main menu item  Press and  hold the RIGH
157. haust System    The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  system     If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system   or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle   or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged   have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex   haust system and adjacent body areas for broken  dam   aged  deteriorated  or mispositioned parts  Open seams  or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep  into the passenger compartment  In addition  have the  exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised  for lubrication or oil change  Replace as required     Ned MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 267    WARNING  CAUTION     e Exhaust gases can injure or kill  They contain  carbon monoxide  CO   which is colorless and  odorless  Breathing it can make you unconscious  and can eventually poison you  To avoid breathing  CO  refer to    Safety Tips Exhaust Gas    in    Things  To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle    for further    information      A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park  over materials that can burn  Such materials might  be grass or leaves coming into contact with your  exhaust system  Do not park or operate your ve   hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con   tact anything that can burn     e The catalytic converter requires the use of un   leaded fuel only  Leaded gasoline will destroy the  effectiveness of t
158. have the  radio set the time  To change the Sync Time setting touch  the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark  appears next to the setting  showing that setting has been  selected  Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the  previous menu     e Set Time Hours    When in this display  you may adjust the hours  The Sync  with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked  To make  your selection touch the   or   soft keys to adjust the  hours up or down  Touch the back arrow soft key to  return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to  close out of the settings screen     e Set Time Minutes    When in this display  you may adjust the minutes  The  Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked  To  make your selection touch the   or   soft keys to adjust  the minutes up or down  Touch the back arrow soft key  to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to  close out of the settings screen     e Time Format    When in this display  you may select the time format  display setting  Touch the Time Format soft key until a  check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting   showing that setting has been selected  Touch the back  arrow soft key to return to the previous menu     NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157    Safety   Assistance    After pressing the Safety   Assistance soft key the fol   lowing settings will be available     e ParkView   Backup Camera    Your vehicle may be eguipped with the ParkView  Rear  Back Up Camera that allows you to s
159. he catalyst as an emissions control  device and may seriously reduce engine perfor   mance and cause serious damage to the engine   Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition   In the event of engine malfunction  particularly  involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of  performance  have your vehicle serviced promptly   Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe  malfunction could cause the converter to overheat   resulting in possible damage to the converter and  vehicle        268 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Under normal operating conditions  the catalytic con   verter will not reguire maintenance  However  it is im   portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure  proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst  damage     NOTE  Intentional tampering with emissions control  systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  against you     In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  engine operation  a scorching odor may suggest severe  and abnormal catalyst overheating  If this occurs  stop  the vehicle  turn off the engine and allow it to cool   Service  including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica   tions  should be obtained immediately     To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam    age    e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition   when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in  motion       Do 
160. he ignition in the ON RUN position     NOTE  This light shows only that the parking brake is  applied  It does not show the degree of brake application     8  Tachometer    This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute   RPM x 1000     9  Oil Pressure Warning Light    TH This light indicates low engine oil pressure  The  light should turn on momentarily when the engine is  started  If the light turns on while driving  stop the  vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible  A  chime will sound when this light turns on        Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected   This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine   The engine oil level must be checked under the hood     10  Vehicle Security Light     If Equipped    This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi   mately 15 seconds  when the vehicle security  alarm is arming  and then will flash slowly  until the vehicle is disarmed     11  Fuel Gauge    The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when  the ignition is in the ON RUN position     12  Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light     If  Equipped  i Each tire  including the spare  if provided        should be checked monthly when cold and  inflated to the inflation pressure recommended  by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131    placard or tire inflation pressure label   If your vehicle  has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the  vehicle placard or tire
161. hing to the  fuel     Fuel System Cautions    CAUTION     Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle   s  performance     e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law   Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor   mance and damage the emissions control system         Continued        228 STARTING AND OPERATING EE    CAUTION   Continued     e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition  malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to  overheat  If you notice a pungent burning odor or  some light smoke  your engine may be out of tune  or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser   vice  Contact your authorized dealer for service    assistance    The use of fuel additives  which are now being  sold as octane enhancers  is not recommended   Most of these products contain high concentrations  of methanol  Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor   mance problems resulting from the use of such  fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the  manufacturer        Carbon Monoxide Warnings    WARNING     Carbon monoxide  CO  in exhaust gases is deadly    Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon   monoxide poisoning      Do not inhale exhaust gases  They contain carbon  monoxide  a colorless and odorless gas  which can    kill  Never run the engine in a closed area  such as  a garage  and never sit in a parked vehicle with the  engine running for an extended period  If the  vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine  running for more than a sh
162. ids  solvents  detergents  or  ammonia based cleaners to clean the leather  Application  of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the  original condition        282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME    Glass Surfaces    All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis  with MOPAR   Glass Cleaner  or any commercial  household type glass cleaner  Never use an abrasive type  cleaner  Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win   dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear  quarter window equipped with the radio antenna  Do  not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may  scratch the elements     When cleaning the rear view mirror  spray cleaner on the  towel or rag that you are using  Do not spray cleaner  directly on the mirror     Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses    The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are  molded in clear plastic  When cleaning the lenses  care  must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic     1  Clean with a wet soft rag  A mild soap solution may be  used  but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive  cleaners  If soap is used  wipe clean with a clean damp  rag     2  Dry with a soft cloth   Seat Belt Maintenance    Do not bleach  dye or clean the belts with chemical  solvents or abrasive cleaners  This will weaken the fabric   Sun damage can also weaken the fabric     If the belts need cleaning  use a mild soap solution or  lukewarm water  Do not remove the belts from the car to  wash them  Dry
163. imals inside parked       Exhaust Gas    WARNING     Exhaust gases can injure or kill  They contain carbon   Continued  monoxide  CO   which is colorless and odorless   Breathing it can make you unconscious and can    vehicles in hot weather  Interior heat build up may  cause serious injury or death         Continued     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69    WARNING   Continued     eventually poison you  To avoid breathing  CO     follow these safety tips      Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in  confined areas any longer than needed to move  your vehicle in or out of the area      If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate    open  make sure that all windows are closed and  the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high  speed  DO NOT use the recirculation mode    e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the  engine running  adjust your heating or cooling  controls to force outside air into the vehicle  Set the  blower at high speed     The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  system        Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust  system  when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the  vehicle  or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is  damaged  have a competent mechanic inspect the com   plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken   damaged  deteriorated  or mispositioned parts  Open  seams or loose connections could p
164. ing Air Mode Power Button  4  again to turn Off the TIREFIT    Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to this position kit   Zn for air pump operation only  Use the Black Air Using The Deflation Button    Pump Hose  7  when selecting this mode       Press the Deflation Button  2  to reduce the air  pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated        238 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  Sa  TIREFIT Usage Precautions    e    Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealant  Hose  6  prior to the expiration date  printed on the  bottle label  to assure optimum operation of the sys   tem  Refer to    Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT    section  F      Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement        The Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealant Hose  6  are a one  tire application use  After each use  always replace  these components immediately at an authorized  dealer     When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form  clean  water  and a damp cloth will remove the material from  the vehicle or tire and wheel components  Once the    sealant dries  it can easily be peeled off and properly  discarded       For optimum performance  make sure the valve stem    on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the  TIREFIT kit     e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle    tires  The kit also comes with two needles  located in  the Accessory Storage Compartment  on the bottom of  the air pump  for inflating sport balls  rafts  or similar  inflatable items  However  use only the Air Pump Hose   7  and m
165. ing Mode    Unbuckle the combination lap  shoulder belt and allow it  to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking  Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive  emergency   locking mode     WARNING     e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if  the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor   ALR  feature or any other seat belt function is not    working properly when checked according to the  procedures in the Service Manual    e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly  could increase the risk of injury in collisions        42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE ed    Seat Belt Pretensioners     If Equipped    The seat belts for both front seating positions may be  eguipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to  remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an  collision  These devices may improve the performance of  the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the  occupant early in an collision  Pretensioners work for all  size occupants  including those in child restraints     NOTE  These devices are not a substitute for proper seat  belt placement by the occupant  The seat belt still must be  worn snugly and positioned properly     The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re   straint Controller  ORC   Like the air bags  the preten   sioners are single use items  A deployed pretensioner or  a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately     Seat Belts and Pregnant Women    
166. ing in higher fuel consump   tion     Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability    Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride   Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable  ride  Both under inflation and over inflation affect the       stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of  sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering     Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict   able steering response     Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the  vehicle to drift left or right     Tire Inflation Pressures    The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the  driver s side    B    Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side  door     The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well  as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at  least once a month  Use a good quality pocket type gauge  to check tire pressure  Do not make a visual judgement  when determining proper inflation  Radial tires may look  properly inflated even when they are under inflated        216 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    CAUTION     After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure  al     ways reinstall the valve stem cap  This will prevent  moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem   which could damage the valve stem        Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always     cold tire inflation pressure     Cold tire inflation pressure  is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicl
167. ion is in ON RUN and the parking  brake is not set     e When vehicle speed is not 0 mph  0 km h      e When all doors are locked  except for RKE transmitter  liftgate access   Refer to    Entering the Liftgate with the  System Armed     Coupe    under    Security Alarm  System    for additional information     The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Electronic  Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  when the liftgate is  open     WARNING       Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous  exhaust gases into your vehicle  You and your  passengers could be injured by these fumes  Keep  the liftgate closed when you are operating the    vehicle    e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open   make sure that all windows are closed  and the  climate control blower switch is set at high speed   Do not use the recirculation mode        Gas props support the liftgate in the open position   However  because the gas pressure drops with tempera   ture  it may be necessary to assist the props when  opening the liftgate in cold weather     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33    OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS    Some of the most important safety features in your  vehicle are the restraint systems       Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating  positions    Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen   ger      An energy absorbing steering column and steering  wheel    Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants    e     Seat belts incorporate pret
168. ious  customer oriented documents  Please take the time to  read these publications carefully  Following the instruc   tions and recommendations in this manual will help  assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle     NOTE  After reviewing the owner information  it  should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc   ing and remain with the vehicle when sold     When it comes to service  remember that your authorized  dealer knows your vehicle best  has factory trained tech   nicians and genuine parts  and cares about your satisfac   tion     HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL    Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section  contains the information you desire     Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the  items of equipment ordered  certain descriptions and  illustrations may differ from your vehicle   s equipment     The detailed index at the back of this Owner   s Manual  contains a complete listing of all subjects     Consult the following table for a description of the  symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout  this Owner   s Manual        INTRODUCTION 5       Cd       in  Iglo  i       ED   m            I    ELECTRONIC STABILITY    ii  t  p     i  i  i  i    du    E  Y  O  T  i   amp  i    i    x  slp       i  i  f  3     i  i  E    A    Dp iw  EI   i Nc   CO   t    8  2  i  f  i    1910  ES  H  D  ie  ima la ip   TI            i  i  i      i  i  i  i  i     i  i  i  i    HEATED    i     I    d  EI    Ju  IS    de   18  t  jor  
169. is a fault in the electron   ics  Should this occur  have the vehicle serviced as soon  as possible by an authorized dealer     ible with some after market remote starting systems   Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting  problems and loss of security protection        All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have  been programmed to the vehicle electronics     Replacement Keys    NOTE  Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the  vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the  vehicle  Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle  it  cannot be programmed to any other vehicle     en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17    CAUTION       Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and  lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat     tended    e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go      always remember to place the ignition in the OFF  position     At the time of purchase  the original owner is provided  with a four digit Personal Identification Number  PIN    Keep the PIN in a secure location  This number is  required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs   Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho   rized dealer  this procedure consists of programming a  blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics  A blank Key Fob  is one that has never been programmed        NOTE  When having the Sentry Key  Immobilizer Sys   tem serviced  bring all vehicle keys with you to an  authorized dealer    Customer Key Programming   Prog
170. ive this information     224 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss    Service TPMS Warning    If a system fault is detected  the TPM Telltale Light will  flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid   The system fault will also sound a chime  In addition  the  EVIC will display a  SERVICE TPM SYSTEM  message  for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes        in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor  is not being received     If the ignition switch is cycled  this sequence will repeat   providing the system fault still exists  If the system fault  no longer exists  the TPM Telltale Light will no longer  flash  and the  SERVICE TPM SYSTEM  message will no  longer display  and a pressure value will display in place  of the dashes  A system fault can occur due to any of the  following     1  Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving  next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as  the TPM sensors     2  Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains  materials that may block radio wave signals     3  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or  wheel housings     4  Using tire chains on the vehicle   5  Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors     The EVIC will also display a  SERVICE TPM SYSTEM   message for a minimum of five seconds when a system  fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is  detected  In this case  the  SERVICE TPM SYSTEM     message is then followed with a graphic display with  pr
171. laced with a new filter  at every engine oil change     Engine Oil Filter Selection    This manufacturer   s engines have a full flow type oil  filter  Use a filter of this type for replacement  The quality  of replacement filters varies considerably  Only high  quality filters should be used to assure most efficient  service  MOPAR   engine oil filters are a high quality oil  filter and are recommended     Engine Air Cleaner Filter    Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals     260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    WARNING     The air induction system  air cleaner  hoses  etc   can  provide a measure of protection in the case of engine  backfire  Do not remove the air induction system  air  cleaner  hoses  etc   unless such removal is necessary    for repair or maintenance  Make sure that no one is  near the engine compartment before starting the  vehicle with the air induction system  air cleaner   hoses  etc   removed  Failure to do so can result in  serious personal injury     Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection    The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters  varies considerably  Only high quality filters should be  used to assure most efficient service  MOPAR   engine air  cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom   mended        CAUTION     Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause    mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a  driveability problem or a limp home condition        Maintenance Free B
172. lations of salt  waxes  or road film  and  help reduce streaking and smearing     Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods  may cause deterioration of the wiper blades  Always use  washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  from a dry windshield or rear window     Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from  the windshield or rear window  Make sure that they are  not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid  damaging the blade  Keep the blade rubber out of contact  with petroleum products such as engine oil  gasoline  etc     NOTE  Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend   ing on geographical area and frequency of use  Poor  performance of blades may be present with chattering   marks  water lines or wet spots  If any of these conditions  are present  clean the wiper blades or replace as neces     sary        266 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M    Adding Washer Fluid    The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the  front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of  the vehicle  Be sure to check the fluid level in the  reservoir at regular intervals  Fill the reservoir with  windshield washer solvent  not engine coolant  anti   freeze  and operate the system for a few seconds to flush  out the residual water     WARNING     Commercially available windshield washer solvents    are flammable  They could ignite and burn you  Care  must be exercised when filling or working around  the washer solution        Ex
173. le      Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information     Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals         Continued     ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271    CAUTION   Continued     e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine  coolant  antifreeze  products  Do not use additional  rust inhibitors or antirust products  as they may not  be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and    may plug the radiator    e This vehicle has not been designed for use with  propylene glycol based engine coolant  antifreeze    Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant  an   tifreeze  is not recommended     Adding Coolant    Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine  coolant  OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106  that  allows extended maintenance intervals  This engine cool   ant  antifreeze  can be used up to ten years or 150 000  miles  240 000 km  before replacement  To prevent reduc   ing this extended maintenance period  it is important that       you use the same engine coolant  OAT coolant conform   ing to MS 12106  throughout the life of your vehicle     Please review these recommendations for using Organic  Additive Technology  OAT  engine coolant  antifreeze   that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan   dard MS 12106  When adding engine coolant  antifreeze      e We recommend using MOPAR   Antifreeze  Coolant  10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT  Organic Additive  Technology  that meets the requirements of Chrysler 
174. le Limited    Warranty expires  The manufacturer stands behind only  the manufacturer s service contracts  If you purchased a  manufacturer s service contract  you will receive Plan  Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail  within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date  If you  have any questions about the service contract  call the  manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer  Hotline at 1 800 521 9922  Canadian residents  call  800   465 2001 English    800  387 9983 French      The manufacturer will not stand behind any service  contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract  It  is not responsible for any service contract other than the  manufacturer s service contract  If you purchased a ser   vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract   and you require service after the manufacturer s New  Vehicle Limited Warranty expires  please refer to the  contract documents  and contact the person listed in  those documents        322 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M    We appreciate that you have made a major investment  when you purchased the vehicle  An authorized dealer  has also made a major investment in facilities  tools  and  training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with  the ownership experience  You will be pleased with their  sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  concerns     WARNING     Engine exhaust  some of its constituents  and certain  vehicle components contain  or emit  chemicals
175. le Loading    section  of this manual     NOTE  Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition   gross axle weight ratings  GAWRs  for the front and rear  axles must not be exceeded  For further information on  GAWKRs  vehicle loading  and trailer towing  refer to   Vehicle Loading  in this section     NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 211    To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4  The resulting figure equals the available amount of  vehicle  locate the statement    The combined weight of  occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or  XXX kg    on the Tire and Loading Information placard   The combined weight of occupants  cargo luggage and  trailer tongue weight  if applicable  should never exceed  the weight referenced here     Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit    1     Locate the statement    The combined weight of occu   pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or  XXX kg    on your vehicle   s placard       Determine the combined weight of the driver and    passengers that will be riding in your vehicle       Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas     sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg     cargo and luggage load capacity  For example  if   XXX  amount equals 1 400 Ibs  635 kg  and there will  be five 150 Ib  68 kg  passengers in your vehicle  the  amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity  is 650 lbs  295 kg   since 5 x 150   750  and 1400   750    650 Ibs  295 kg         Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo    being load
176. le by the end of the day  discuss the situation with    the service advisor and list the items in order of priority   At many authorized dealer  you may obtain a rental  vehicle at a minimal daily charge  If you need a rental  it  is advisable to make these arrangements when you call  for an appointment     IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE    The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally  interested in your satisfaction  We want you to be happy  with our products and services     Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer   We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an  authorized dealer  They know your vehicle the best  and  are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality  service  The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the  facilities  factory trained technicians  special tools  and  the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed  correctly and in a timely manner        320 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M    This is why you should always talk to an authorized  dealer service manager first  Most matters can be re   solved with this process     e If for some reason you are still not satisfied  talk to the  general manager or owner of the authorized dealer   They want to know if you need assistance     e  f an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern   you may contact the manufacturer s customer center     Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen   ter should include the following information     e Owner s name and ad
177. ll show separate zones that will help    Ed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105    indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The follow   ing table shows the approximate distances for each zone                    Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle  Red 0   1 ft  0   30 cm    Yellow 1 ft   3 ft  30cm   1 m    Green 3 ft or greater  1 m or greater           WARNING     Drivers must be careful when backing up even when  using the ParkView  Rear Back Up Camera  Always  check carefully behind your vehicle  and be sure to    check for pedestrians  animals  other vehicles  ob   structions  or blind spots before backing up  You are  responsible for the safety of your surroundings and  must continue to pay attention while backing up   Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death        CAUTION       To avoid vehicle damage  ParkView  should only    be used as a parking aid  The Park View   camera is  unable to view every obstacle or object in your  drive path         Continued        106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEE    CAUTION   Continued  4  Press the    Safety  amp  Driving Assistance    soft key     e To avoid vehicle damage  the vehicle must be    gt  Press the check box soft key next to    Parkview   driven slowly when using ParkView  to be able to Backup Camera  to enable disable     GARAGE DOOR OPENER     IF EQUIPPED    stop in time when an obstacle is seen  It is recom   mended that the driver look freq
178. location accessible to children  and do not  leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N  SENTRY KEY    Go   in the ACC or ON RUN mode  A child could   The Sentry Key   Immobilizer system prevents unauthor   operate power windows  other controls  or move   ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine  The  the vehicle  system does not need to be armed or activated  Operation  is automatic  regardless of whether the vehicle is locked   Continued    or unlocked        16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE    CAUTION     The Sentry Key  Immobilizer system is not compat     The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitter  a Keyless Ignition Node  KIN  and a  RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation   Therefore  only Key Fobs that are programmed to the  vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle     After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position  the  Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a  bulb check  If the light remains on after the bulb check  it  indicates that there is a problem with the electronics  In  addition  if the light begins to flash after the bulb check   it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start  the engine  Either of these conditions will result in the  engine being shut off after two seconds     If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal  vehicle operation  vehicle running for longer than 10  seconds   it indicates that there 
179. lock up and stall out  and leave you  stranded    e Failure to follow these warnings may result in  injuries that are serious or fatal to you  your pas   sengers  and others around you        NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 189    POWER STEERING    The standard power steering system will give you good  vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability  in tight spaces  The system will provide mechanical  steering capability if power assist is lost     If for some reason the power assist is interrupted  it will  still be possible to steer your vehicle  Under these condi   tions  you will observe a substantial increase in steering  effort  especially at very low vehicle speeds and during  parking maneuvers     NOTE       Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel  travel are considered normal and do not indicate that  there is a problem with the power steering system       Upon initial start up in cold weather  the power steer   ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time   This is due to the cold  thick fluid in the steering  system  This noise should be considered normal  and it  does not in any way damage the steering system     WARNING     Continued operation with reduced power steering  assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others   Service should be obtained as soon as possible     CAUTION     Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end  of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering  fluid temperature and it should be avoi
180. ly  recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the  reguirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725     The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic  0W 40 or equivalent engine oil     CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the    chemicals can damage your engine  Such damage is  not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty        Engine Oil Viscosity  SAE Grade     SAE 0W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating  temperatures     NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259    The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine  oil viscosity for your engine  For information on engine oil  filler cap location  refer to    Engine Compartment    in    Main   taining Your Vehicle    for further information     Materials Added To Engine Oil    The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad   dition of any additives  other than leak detection dyes  to  the engine oil  Engine oil is an engineered product and its  performance may be impaired by supplemental addi   tives     Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters    Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and  oil filters from your vehicle  Used oil and oil filters   indiscriminately discarded  can present a problem to the  environment  Contact your authorized dealer  service  station or governmental agency for advice on how and  where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in  your area     Engine Oil Filter    The engine oil filter should be rep
181. matter what the speed        Tread Wear Indicators    Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires  to help you in determining when your tires should be  replaced           055007576    1     Worn Tire  2     New Tire       These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread  grooves  They will appear as bands when the tread depth  becomes 1 16 in  2 mm   When the tread is worn to the  tread wear indicators  the tire should be replaced     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 219    Life Of Tire    The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying  factors including  but not limited to     e Driving style  e Tire pressure  e Distance driven    e Performance tires  tires with a speed rating of V or  higher and summer tires  typically have a reduced  tread life  Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main   tenance schedule is highly recommended     WARNING     Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six    years  regardless of the remaining tread  Failure to  follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure         Continued     WARNING   Continued        You could lose control and have a collision resulting  in serious injury or death     Keep dismounted tires in a cool  dry place with as little  exposure to light as possible  Protect tires from contact  with oil  grease  and gasoline     Replacement Tires    The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  characteristics  They should be inspected regularly for  wear and correct cold tire i
182. most desirable to listen to or to  exclude undesirable channels while scanning  To make  your selection  touch the Channel Skip soft key  select the  channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the  arrow back soft key     NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163    e Subscription Information    New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free  limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio  with your radio  Following the expiration of the free  services  it will be necessary to access the information on  the Subscription Information screen in order to re   subscribe     Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub   scription Information screen     Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver  To  reactivate your service  either call the number listed on  the screen or visit the provider online     NOTE  SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription  and is available for U S  residents only     Uconnect   RADIOS     IF EQUIPPED    For detailed information about your Uconnect   radio  refer to your Uconnect   Supplement Manual     iPod   USB MP3 CONTROL     IF EQUIPPED       This feature allows an iPod   or external USB device to be  plugged into the USB port     164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    iPod   control supports Mini  4G  Photo  Nano  5G iPod    and iPhone   devices  Some iPod   software versions  may not fully support the iPod   control features  Please  visit Apple   s website for
183. n the    child    category  This could be a  child  a teenager  or even a small adult  Therefore  even  if the driver s Advanced Front Air Bag deploys  the  passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag may not deploy     Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim   but they will open during Air Bag deployment     After any collision  the vehicle should be taken to an  authorized dealer immediately     Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize  the risk of harm from a deploying Air Bag     1  An infant up to one year or approximately 20 lbs  9 kg     should never ride in the vehicle because in the event of  a crash  the rear facing child seat places them too close  to the passenger Air Bag       An infant in a rear facing child safety seat  designed    for a child up to one year or approximately 20 lbs   9 kg   should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle  equipped with a passenger Air Bag  unless the Air Bag  is shut OFF  An Air Bag deployment can cause severe  injury or death to an infant in this position  Refer to   Passenger Air Bag Disabled  PAD  Indicator Light        A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat    belt properly should be secured in a child safety seat  or booster seat   Refer to  Child Restraints      Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47    4     An older child who does not use a child safety seat or  booster seat should ride buckled properly in their seat       Never allow a child to place the shoulder belt behind
184. nction  use only the specified  e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per   form repairs and service when necessary could    fluid for the flushing procedure   result in more costly repairs  damage to other  Engine Oil    Checking Oil Level       components or negatively impact vehicle perfor   mance  Immediately have potential malfunctions  examined by an authorized dealer or qualified   To assure proper engine lubrication  the engine oil must  repair center  be maintained at the correct level  Check the oil level at  regular intervals  such as every fuel stop  The best time to        Continued     258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a  fully warmed engine is turned off or before starting the  engine after it has sat overnight     Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also  will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings  Add  oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark     CAUTION     Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or  loss of oil pressure  This could damage your engine        Change Engine Oil  Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals     NOTE  Under no circumstances should oil change inter   vals exceed 6 000 miles  10 000 km  or six months   whichever occurs first     Engine Oil Selection    For best performance and maximum protection under all  types of operating conditions  the manufacturer on
185. nd are identified on the    battery case  Cable clamps should be tight on the  terminal posts and free of corrosion    e If a  fast charger  is used while the battery is in the  vehicle  disconnect both vehicle battery cables be   fore connecting the charger to the battery  Do not  use a  fast charger  to provide starting voltage        Hibernation Mode    The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power  when storing the vehicle  It allows for up to three months  of storage time without losing radio and engine control   ler memory  Using this feature is an alternative to discon   necting the battery     NOTE  This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a  fully charged battery for up to 30 days  If you plan to  store the vehicle longer than 30 days  we recommend  doing one of the following       Disconnect the battery     Use the battery charger     e Put the vehicle into Battery Save mode  3 month  charge      NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 263    To Activate Hibernation Mode  1  Cycle the ignition switch to  ACCY      2  Select Hibernation mode within the Electronic Vehicle  Information Center  EVIC      3  Press and hold the right arrow button on the steering  wheel controls for 1 second  Vehicle will countdown  from ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode     NOTE  You may press the right arrow button on the  steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort  Hibernation Mode     To Deactivate Hibernation Mode  1  Press the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicl
186. nd engine oil  filter   11 Rotate tires                 Odometer Reading Date       Repair Order   Dealer Code       Signature  Authorized Service Center             312 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se       120 000 Miles  200 000 km  or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule    Change the engine oil and engine oil filter    Rotate tires    Replace the engine air cleaner filter    Replace the air conditioning filter  if eguipped     Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150 000 miles  250 000 km  whichever comes first   Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    Adjust parking brake on vehicles eguipped with four wheel disc brakes    Inspect the exhaust system    Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary    Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage  wear  improper looseness or end  play  replace if necessary        LLULELEULEELELEEE       Odometer Reading Date       Repair Order   Dealer Code       Signature  Authorized Service Center             NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 313       126 000 Miles  210 000 km  or 132 000 Miles  220 000 km  or 132 Months Maintenance Service  126 Months Maintenance Schedule       Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   1 Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires   filter   1 Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    T Rotate tires  T Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary   T Change the rear axle fluid  T 
187. nflation pressure  The manu   facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva   lent to the originals in size  quality and performance  when replacement is needed   Refer to the paragraph on     Tread Wear Indicators    Refer to the    Tire and Loading  Information  placard for the size designation of your tire   The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be  found on the original equipment tire sidewall  See the       220 STARTING AND OPERATING Se    WARNING     Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety  Information section of this manual for more information    relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire  e Do not use a tire  wheel size or rating other than  that specified for your vehicle  Some combinations  of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus   pension dimensions and performance characteris   tics  resulting in changes to steering  handling  and  braking of your vehicle  This can cause unpredict   able handling and stress to steering and suspen     It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two  rear tires as a pair  Replacing just one tire can seriously  affect your vehicle   s handling  If you ever replace a  wheel  make sure that the wheel   s specifications match  those of the original wheels     It is recommended you contact your original equipment sion components  You could lose control and have  or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may a collision resulting in serious injury or death  Use  have on 
188. ng any kind of badges or    stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the  upper right side of the instrument panel  Do not  modify the front bumper  vehicle body structure  or  add aftermarket side steps or running boards    e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air  bag system yourself  Be sure to tell anyone who  works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system         Continued     WARNING   Continued       Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag  system  The air bag may inflate accidentally or may  not function properly if modifications are made   Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any  air bag system service  If your seat  including your    trim cover and cushion  needs to be serviced in any  way  including removal or loosening tightening of  seat attachment bolts   take the vehicle to your  authorized dealer  Only manufacturer approved  seat accessories may be used  If it is necessary to  modify the air bag system for persons with dis   abilities  contact your authorized dealer        NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59    Air Bag Warning Light    You will want to have the Air Bags ready to  inflate for your protection in a collision  The  Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal  circuits and interconnecting wiring associated  with Air Bag system electrical components  While the Air  Bag system is designed to be maintenance free  if any of  the following occurs  have an authorized dealer service  the Air Ba
189. ng the engine or spinning the wheels too fast   DO not tow with sling type equipment  Only use flatbed  may lead to transmission or clutch overheating and   equipment  Always comply with applicable state or local  failure  It can also damage the tires  Do not spin the   towing ordinances     wheels above 30 mph  48 km h  while in gear  no  CAUTION     transmission shifting occurring    Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require     WARNING     ments can cause severe transmission damage  Dam   age from improper towing is not covered under the  New Vehicle Limited Warranty     Fast spinning tires can be dangerous  Forces gener   ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage  or  even failure  of the axle and tires  A tire could  explode and injure someone  Do not spin your vehi   cle   s wheels faster than 30 mph  48 km h  or for  longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop   ping when you are stuck  And do not let anyone near  a spinning wheel  no matter what the speed           MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE    CONTENTS    ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT     8 4L            253  ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM  OBD II      254  ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE                         PROGRAMS       ien ee eee 254   W REPLACEMENT PARTS is ei os be ek n eN ede 256  B DEALER SERVICE    sv ons sis RR 256  E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES             257  H Engine Oil mere este EE eet RR 257  Engine Oil Filter   cs paesani st tribi s nuia 259  Engine Air Cleaner Filter         cese 
190. nger seat  Refer to    Automatic Locking Mode         To restrain the child seat     1  Pull enough webbing from the retractor to allow the    belt to pass through the child restraint and insert the  latch plate into the buckle until you hear a    click          Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull all of    the webbing out of the retractor       Allow some of the webbing to retract back into the    retractor  As the belt retracts  you will hear a clicking  sound indicating that the belt is now in Automatic  Locking Mode       Tighten the lap portion of the belt and allow the excess    webbing to retract back to the retractor  If it still does  not make the child restraint secure  then secure the  child restraint with the Child Restraint Tether Anchor     en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67    NOTE  Once the belt is in Automatic Locking Mode  you  will not be able to pull any more of the webbing out of  the retractor  In this mode  you will only be able to retract  excess webbing into the retractor to secure the child  restraint     Transporting Pets    Deploying Air Bags could harm your pet  An unre   strained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured  or  injure a passenger during panic braking or in an collision     Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers  that are secured by seat belts     BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS    A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain   engine  transmission  and rear axle  in your new 
191. nhill grade  and away from the curb on an uphill grade     To apply the parking brake  grasp the handle and pull it  rearward until you feel resistance  To release the parking  brake  grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing  the button on the end of the handle  When the button  drops into the handle  releasing the lock   guide the  handle downward to its stop and then release the button  and the handle        The parking brake should always be applied when the  driver is not in the vehicle     192 STARTING AND OPERATING M    The    Brake System Warning Light    in the instrument WARNING     cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON RUN  position and the parking brake is applied  e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  Leaving  children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a  number of reasons  A child or others could be  injured seriously or fatally  Do not leave the key  fob in or near the vehicle  or in a location accessible    NOTE  This light only shows that the parking brake is  applied or a brake ABS system fault  It does not show  the degree of brake application  If the    Brake System  Warning Light    is illuminated when the parking brake is  not applied please see your authorized dealer     to children   and do not leave a vehicle equipped  with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN  mode  A child could operate power windows  other  controls  or move the vehicle      Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  before driving  Failu
192. not allow people to ride in any area of your  vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat    belts    Two people should never be belted into a single  seat belt  People belted together can crash into one  another in an collision  hurting one another badly   Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more  than one person  no matter what their size       Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  using a seat belt properly      Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous  Seat  belts are designed to go around the large bones of  your body  These are the strongest parts of your  body and can take the force of a collision they best         Continued     36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE    Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3  Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary  to make the belt go around your lap        1  Enter the vehicle and close the door  Sit back and  adjust the seat  4  When the belt is long enough to fit  insert the latch  plate into the buckle until you hear a    click        2  The seat belt latch plate is located at the side of your  seat back  Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt        Latch Plate To Buckle    Latch Plate    Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37    WARNING  WARNING   Continued       A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous   Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the  vehicle in a collision  increasing head and neck  injury  A belt worn under the arm can ca
193. not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  vehicle     e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  disconnected or removed  such as when diagnostic  testing  or for prolonged periods during very rough  idle or malfunctioning operating conditions     NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 269    Cooling System    WARNING     e When working near the radiator cooling fan   disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition  switch to the LOCK position  The fan is tempera   ture controlled and can start at any time the igni   tion switch is in the ON position       You or others can be badly burned by hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  or steam from your radiator  If  you see or hear steam coming from under the hood   do not open the hood until the radiator has had  time to cool  Never try to open a cooling system  pressure cap when the radiator is hot        Coolant Checks    Check engine coolant  antifreeze  protection every 12  months  before the onset of freezing weather  where  applicable   If the engine coolant  antifreeze  is dirty or  rusty in appearance  the system should be drained   flushed  and refilled with fresh engine coolant  anti   freeze   Check the front of the A C condenser  radiator  for any accumulation of bugs  leaves  etc  If dirty  clean by  gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically  down the face of the condenser radiator     Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub   ber  cracking  tears  cuts  and tightness of the conne
194. ns     WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 247       Remote Jump Start Connections    1     Positive Battery Post      2     Negative Battery Post        248 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE    CAUTION     Failure to follow these procedures could result in    damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle  or the discharged vehicle        6  Connect the positive     end of the jumper cable to the  remote positive     post of the discharged vehicle     7  Connect the opposite end of the positive     jumper  cable to the positive     post of the booster battery     8  Connect the negative end     of the jumper cable to the  negative     post of the booster battery     9  Connect the opposite end of the negative     jumper  cable to the remote negative     post of the vehicle with  the discharged battery     WARNING     Do not connect the cable to the negative post     of the    discharged battery  The resulting electrical spark  could cause the battery to explode and could result in  personal injury        10  Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster  battery  let the engine idle a few minutes  and then  start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged  battery     Once the engine is started  remove the jumper cables in  the reverse sequence     11  Disconnect the negative     jumper cable from the  remote negative     post of the vehicle with the  discharged battery     12  Disconnect the negative end     of the jumper cable  from the negative     post of the booster ba
195. ns  These practical manuals  make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix  problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and  features  They show exactly how to find and correct  problems the first time  using step by step troubleshoot   ing and drivability procedures  proven diagnostic tests  and a complete list of all tools and equipment     IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M    Owner   s Manuals    These Owner   s Manuals have been prepared with the  assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac   quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles   Included are starting  operating  emergency and mainte   nance procedures as well as specifications  capabilities  and safety tips     Call toll free at    e 1 800 890 4038  U S     e 1 800 387 1143  Canada    Or   Visit us on the Worldwide Web at     e www techauthority com    NEE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 325    DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM  TIRE QUALITY GRADES    The following tire grading categories were established by  the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  The  specific grade rating assigned by the tire   s manufacturer  in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on  your vehicle     All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety  requirements in addition to these grades     Treadwear    The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating  based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course  For  
196. nt seat passenger  the OCS components must function  as designed  Do not make any modifications to the front  passenger seat components  assembly  or to the seat  cover  If the seat  trim cover  or cushion needs service for       any reason  take the vehicle to your authorized dealer   Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may  be used    The following requirements must be strictly followed     Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or  components in any way     Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or  cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for  the specific model being repaired  Always use the  correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle     Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an  aftermarket seat cover or cushion     Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat     At no time should any supplemental restraint system   SRS  component or SRS related component or fastener  be modified or replaced with any part except those  which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC         56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    event the ORC will determine whether to have the  Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow   ing functions     WARNING     Unapproved modifications or service procedures to  the passenger seat assembly  its related components   seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the  Air Bag deployment in case of a frontal collision     This could result in dea
197. ntains aluminum components       Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow  hoses are not kinked or obstructed       Keep the front of the radiator clean  If your vehicle is  equipped with air conditioning  keep the front of the  condenser clean       Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter  operation  If replacement is ever necessary  install ONLY  the correct type thermostat  Other designs may result in  unsatisfactory engine coolant  antifreeze  performance   poor gas mileage  and increased emissions     Brake System    In order to assure brake system performance  all brake  system components should be inspected periodically   Refer to  Maintenance Schedule  for the proper mainte   nance intervals     NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275    WARNING     Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  possibly an accident  Driving with your foot resting    or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  high brake temperatures  excessive lining wear  and  possible brake damage  You would not have your full  braking capacity in an emergency        Master Cylinder   Brake Fluid Level Check    Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if  the brake system warning light indicates system failure     Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per   forming underhood services     Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing  the cap  If necessary  add fluid to bring the fluid level up  to the requirements described on the 
198. ntinuing     If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at  least 26 psi  1 8 Bar  pressure within 15 minutes     1  Press the Power Button  4  to turn off the TIREFIT kit     2  Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the  Sealant Bottle  1  and place the sticker on the instru   ment panel     3  Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose  6  from the  valve stem  reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of  the hose  and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage  location  Quickly proceed to  D     Drive Vehicle      NEE ed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 243    CAUTION  WARNING     TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair  Have the  tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using      The metal end fitting from Power Plug  8  may get  hot after use  so it should be handled carefully      Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end TIREFIT  Do not exceed 55 mph  88 km h  until the   tire is repaired or replaced  Failure to follow this   warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal    to you  your passengers  and others around you     of the Sealant Hose  6  can result in sealant con   tacting your skin  clothing  and the vehicle   s inte   rior  It can also result in sealant contacting internal  TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma   nent damage to the kit   E  After Driving  6  Pull over to a safe location  Refer to    Whenever You Stop   to Use TIREFIT    before continuing     1  Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to the Ai
199. o unlock either  the driver   s door or all doors on the first press of the  UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter  To change the  current setting  refer to    Uconnect   Access Settings    in     Understanding Your Instrument Panel    for further in   formation        22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEE ed    To Lock The Doors    Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit   ter to lock the doors  The horn will chirp once and the  park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowl   edge the signal     Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock    This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors  are locked with the RKE transmitter  This feature can be  turned on or turned off  To change the current setting   refer to    Uconnect  Access Settings    in    Understanding  Your Instrument Panel    for further information     To Unlatch The Liftgate    Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two  times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate     Using The Panic Alarm    To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off  press and hold  the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one  second and release  When the Panic Alarm is on  the  headlights will turn on  the park lights will flash  the  horn will pulse on and off  and the interior lights will  turn on     The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless  you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a  second time or drive the vehicle at a speed o
200. oad conditions  and  posted speed limits   Load Identification      blank         Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load  SL  tire  Extra Load  XL    Extra load  or reinforced  tire  Light Load  LL    Light load tire  C  D  E  E  G   Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure  Maximum Load    Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry  Maximum Pressure    Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for  this tire                                     206 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE  Tire Identification Number  TIN  Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  tires as mounted on the vehicle  If the TIN is not found on  the outboard side  then you will find it on the inboard  side of the tire     The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire   however  the date code may only be on one side  Tires  with white sidewalls will have the full TIN  including the  date code  located on the white sidewall side of the tire   EXAMPLE     DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301             DOT   Department of Transportation      This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S  Department of Transportation tire  safety standards and is approved for highway use   MA   Code representing the tire manufacturing location  two digits        L9   Code representing the tire size  two digits   ABCD   Code 
201. og   km h or mph     e Main Screen     The inner ring of the display will  illuminate in gray under normal conditions  yellow  for non critical warning  red for critical warnings and  white for on demand information     e Selectable Information  Compass  Temp  Range  to  Empty  Trip A  Trip B  Average MPG     e Menu Titles   Odometer   e Menu Set  Selectable Icons   e Shift Lever Status  PRNDL   e Reconfigurable Telltales   e Audio   Phone Information    e Sub menu Current Position     Whenever there are  sub menus available  the position within the sub   menus is here    Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  for  further information     7  Brake Warning Light    This light monitors various brake functions   BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake  application  If the brake light turns on it may    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129    indicate that the parking brake is applied  that the brake  fluid level is low  or that there is a problem with the  anti lock brake system reservoir     If the light remains on when the parking brake has been  disengaged  and the fluid level is at the full mark on the  master cylinder reservoir  it indicates a possible brake  hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the  Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake  System  ABS    Electronic Stability Control  ESC  system   In this case  the light will remain on until the condition  has been corrected  If the problem is related to the b
202. old the desired HomeLink   button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds  Do  not release the button     3  Without releasing the button proceed with    Program   ming A Non Rolling Code    Step 2 and follow all  remaining steps     Canadian Gate Operator Programming    For programming transmitters in Canada United States  that require the transmitter signals to    time out    after  several seconds of transmission     Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig   nals to time out  or quit  after several seconds of trans   mission   which may not be long enough for HomeLink    to pick up the signal during programming  Similar to this  Canadian law  some U S  gate operators are designed to  time out in the same manner     It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling  process to prevent possible overheating of the garage  door or gate motor     1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE    2     Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm   away from the HomeLink   button you wish to program  while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in view       Continue to press and hold the HomeLink   button     while you press and release     cycle      your hand held  transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink   has  successfully accepted the frequency signal  The indi   cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when  fully trained       Watch for
203. on  resulting in death or injury        Storage Bin Location       Door Storage    The door panels contain storage areas located in the  lower center area of the door panel        Door Panel Storage       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121  REAR WINDOW FEATURES    Rear Window Defroster     ste  The rear window defroster button is located on   the climate control panel  Press this button to turn  on the rear window defroster  An indicator in the button  will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on  The  rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap   proximately 10 minutes  For an additional five minutes of  operation  press the button a second time     NOTE  To prevent excessive battery drain  use the rear  window defroster only when the engine is operating        122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEE    CAUTION     Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to   the heating elements    e Use care when washing the inside of the rear  window  Do not use abrasive window cleaners on  the interior surface of the window  Use a soft cloth    and a mild washing solution  wiping parallel to the  heating elements  Labels can be peeled off after  soaking with warm water      Do not use scrapers  sharp instruments  or abrasive  window cleaners on the interior surface of the  window       Keep all objects a safe distance from the window           UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL                      CONTENTS  ll I
204. oor when the ignition is in ACC or  ON  engine not running   a chime will sound to remind  you to cycle the ignition to OFF  In addition to the chime   the ignition or accessory on message will display in the  cluster     NOTE  With the Uconnect   system  the power window  switches  radio and power outlets will remain active for  up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF  position  Opening either front door will cancel this  feature  The time for this feature is programmable  Refer  to    Uconnect   Settings    in    Understanding Your Instru   ment Panel    for further information     Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15    WARNING  WARNING   Continued       Do not leave children or animals inside parked  vehicles in hot weather  Interior heat build up may  cause serious injury or death     e When leaving the vehicle  always remove the Key  Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle    e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with  access to an unlocked vehicle      Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is  dangerous for a number of reasons  A child or  others could be seriously or fatally injured  Chil     CAUTION     An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves  Always  remove the Key Fob from vehicle  cycle the ignition  OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle  unattended     dren should be warned not to touch the parking  brake  brake pedal or the shift lever      Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle  or  in a 
205. opardize  the user   s safety or the safety of others        Traction Control System  TCS     This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each  driven wheel  If wheel spin is detected  brake pressure is  applied to the slipping wheel s  and engine power is  reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability     Electronic Stability Control    In full on mode this system enhances directional control  and stability of the vehicle under various driving condi   tions  The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeer   ing the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate  wheel  Engine power may also be reduced to assist in  counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer  and help the vehicle maintain the desired path     NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 199  In full on mode ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to    determine the path that the driver intends to steer the WARNINE OENE     vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle  prevailing toad conditions  ESC cannot prevent all  When the actual path does not match the intended path  accidents  including those resulting from excessive  the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to   Speed in turns  driving on very slippery surfaces  or    assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or hydroplaning  ESC also cannot prevent accidents  understeer  resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro     priate driver input for the conditions  Only a safe   attentive  and skillful driver can
206. ort period  adjust the  ventilation system to force fresh  outside air into  the vehicle        NOTE  Intentional tampering with the emissions control  system can result in civil penalties being assessed against  you      Continued     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 229    WARNING   Continued  4  Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe   the    nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel     Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main  ing     tenance  Have the exhaust system inspected every    time the vehicle is raised  Have any abnormal  NOTE  Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches  conditions repaired promptly  Until repaired  drive   allowing the flapper door to open     with all side windows fully open  5  Fill the vehicle with fuel   when the fuel nozzle      Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to  clicks  or shuts off the fuel tank is full  EE  prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex   haust gases from entering the vehicle  6  Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door        NOTE  A funnel is provided  located in the trunk in the  ADDING FUEL spare tire area  to open the flapper door to allow for    1  Press the fuel filler door release switch  located in the emergency refueling with a gas can     driver s door map pocket   CAUTION     2  Open the fuel filler door     To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling  do not  top  off  the fuel tank after filling     3  There is no fuel filler cap  A flapper door inside the  pipe
207. our authorized dealer immedi   ately and have it fixed        Removing Slack From Belt  6  To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight  lift up on the 7  Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt  A snug belt comfortable and not resting on your neck  The retrac   reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an tor will withdraw any slack in the belt   collision     EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39  8  To release the belt  push the red button in the buckle  Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure    The belt will retract automatically to its stowed posi  q        the foll dure t twist a twisted    tion  If necessary  slide the latch plate down the m ns a ai ei mee    webbing to allow it to retract fully        1  Position the latch plate as close as possible to the    WARNING  anchor point     A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and   2  At about 6 to 12 in  15 to 30 cm  above the latch plate   leave you with no protection  Inspect the belt system grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create  periodically  checking for cuts  frays  or loose parts     a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate     Damaged parts must be replaced immediately  Do   3  Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing     not disassemble or modify the system  Seat belt The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of  assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they the latch plate  
208. owing the  vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without  erasing the set speed memory  Pressing the ON OFF  button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set  speed memory     To Resume Speed    To resume a previously set speed  push the RES      button and release  Resume can be used at any speed  above 20 mph  32 km h      To Vary The Speed Setting    When the Electronic Speed Control is set  you can in   crease speed by pushing the RES     button  If the button  is continually pressed  the set speed will continue to  increase until the button is released  then the new set  speed will be established     Pressing the RES     button once will result in a 1 mph   1 6 km h  increase in set speed  Each subsequent tap of  the button results in an increase of 1 mph  1 6 km h      To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is  set  push the SET     button  If the button is continually  held in the SET     position  the set speed will continue to  decrease until the button is released  Release the button  when the desired speed is reached  and the new set speed  will be established     Pressing the SET     button once will result in a 1 mph   1 6 km h  decrease in set speed  Each subsequent tap of  the button results in a decrease of 1 mph  1 6 km h      To Accelerate For Passing    Press the accelerator as you would normally  When the  pedal is released  the vehicle will return to the set speed        104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNN
209. ows while operating the power window  switches  Such entrapment may result in serious  injury or death     Auto Down Feature    Both power window switches have an AUTO down  feature  Press the window switch to the second detent   release  and the window will go down automatically     To open the window part way  press the window switch  to the first detent and release it when you want the  window to stop     To stop the window from going all the way down during  the AUTO down operation  pull up on the switch briefly        AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection     If  Equipped    Lift the window switch to the second detent  release  and  the window will go up automatically     To stop the window from going all the way up during the  AUTO up operation  push down on the switch briefly     To close the window part way  lift the window switch to  the first detent and release it when you want the window  to stop     NOTE     e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto   closure  it will reverse direction and then go back  down  Remove the obstacle and use the window  switch again to close the window        30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger  the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto   closure  If this happens  pull the switch lightly to the  first detent and hold to close the window manually     WARNING     There is no anti pinch protection when the window    is
210. quests               319 B MOPARG PARTS       ee ee ee 322  Bl IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE                319 W REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS              322  Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center         320 In The 50 United States And  O Chrysler Canada Inc  Customer Center        320 LT Ie A HER  In Mexico contact    320 ERC Mates LE ebtear asd Riese 923                E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS              323       318 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEE ed    ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades  caoiaee ioeo ta 00000  325  TIRE QUALITY GRADES         oe see 325    Treadwe  at susse bocana owed Salk A 325                   Temperature Grades          ee ee ee ee 326                   Ned F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 319    SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  YOUR VEHICLE    Prepare For The Appointment    If you are having warranty work done  be sure to have the  right papers with you  Take your warranty folder  All work  to be performed may not be covered by the warranty   Discuss additional charges with the service manager  Keep  a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history  This  can often provide a clue to the current problem     Prepare A List    Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the  specific work you want done  If you ve had an accident  or work done that is not on your maintenance log  let the  service advisor know     Be Reasonable With Requests    If you list a number of items and you must have your  vehic
211. r  Selection       0 0    cee eee 259  Onboard Diagnostic System                0   254  Opener  Garage Door  HomeLink                 106  Operator Manual  Owner   s Manual                4  Outside Rearview Mirrors                0 00  77  Overheating  Engine esi russie ee rya 000  eee  234  Owner s Manual  Operator Manual                4  Paint Care  iese BARE px yea b ean ts  5 279  Panic Alatmu  esee ae Gala ag wee FSi a 22  Parking Brake  ss sse dete aia N BE ed Re ep 191  Parking On Hill    ek RR meme 191  Passing Light   cesor EE EE EE EE Ee ee ee ee 92   Pedals  Adjustable    5 ce nrc tg 98  EE OE N e 67  Pets  Transporting    auc socer ska e eda kad 67    Placard  Tire and Loading Information            210  Power  Brakes  errora putredo god osa OES as ds 193  Door Locks               llle 25  MIE  OIS 4 4  Side see n Ae ea Ee ee Ee x 4d S 78  Outlet  Auxiliary Electrical Outlet              115  DLCCIING vis d oec diese d Yu aa Pe We EA RE 189  WIndOWS   os ci 544 EE 0 a5 bead e PERLE 28  Pregnant Women and Seat Belts                 42  Pretensioners  Seat Bells    ie ga aud ka RE ER ae Re eared 42    Programming Transmitters  Remote Keyless Entry       23    Radial Ply Tires    0 0 0 0    cece eee syi 217  Radiator Cap  Coolant Pressure Cap              272  Radio Antenna          llle 164  Radio Operation    serme Be eee Le GR 165  Rear Camera vs   s n tov et a ina ce das CS RR e 104  Raar Littgate i cus see Geis EROR RAS OE 30       338 INDEX MMM    Rear Windo
212. r Mode  position         D  Drive Vehicle     Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire    drive the vehicle 5 miles  8 km  or 10 minutes to ensure   distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire  Do not   exceed 55 mph  88 km h   2  Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the  vehicle   s 12 Volt power outlet     244 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME  Uncoil the Air Pump Hose  7   black in color  and 2  Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem     9     screw the fitting at the end of hose  7  onto the valve  stem       Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure    Gauge  3      If tire pressure is less than 19 psi  1 3 Bar   the tire is too  badly damaged  Do not attempt to drive the vehicle  further  Call for assistance     If the tire pressure is 19 psi  1 3 Bar  or higher     L    Press the Power Button  4  to turn on TIREFIT and  inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and  loading information label on the driver side door  opening     NOTE  If the tire becomes over inflated  press the Defla   tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom   mended inflation pressure before continuing     3     reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12  Volt outlet     Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the  vehicle       Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the    earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire  service center       Replace the Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealan
213. r hand on the shift lever while  driving  as this may result in transmission damage     Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear  wheels are spinning due to loss of traction  Dam   age to the transmission may occur        Be sure the transmission is in first gear when moving  forward from a standing position     180 STARTING AND OPERATING M    CAUTION     Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward    from a starting position may result in damage to the  clutch     Shifting    Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the  accelerator pedal before shifting gears  As you release the  clutch pedal  lightly press the accelerator pedal  Damage  to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not  fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator  pedal when shifting     The six speed manual transmission has a spring that  centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear  This  spring helps you know which gear you are in when you  are shifting  Be careful when shifting from first to second  or downshifting from sixth to fifth        The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and  fourth gear  Make sure you move the shift lever into  second or fifth gear  If you let the shift lever move in the  direction of the pulling  you may end shifting from first  to fourth or from sixth to third gear     You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most  city driving  For steady highway driving with light  accelerations 
214. r label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the    vehicle   s loading capacity  the original equipment tire sizes and  the recommended cold tire inflation pressures                    Tire Loading And Tire Pressure  Tire And Loading Information Placard Location    NOTE  The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on  the driver   s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver   s  side door        STARTING AND OPERATING 209    055001823    Tire Placard Location       210 STARTING AND OPERATING  Tire And Loading Information Placard    SEATING CAPACITY   TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3    THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu  N anos AE SHOULD  NEVER EXCEED XXX KG  QR          TIRE FRONT SPARE  ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE    P195470RTA   P195 70R14   1125 70D15  COLD TIRE    SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268       811b5a9a    Tire and Loading Information Placard    This placard tells you important information about the   1  number of people that can be carried in the vehicle  2  total weight your vehicle can carry       3  tire size designed for your vehicle    4  cold tire inflation pressures for the front  rear  and  spare tires     Loading    The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle  You  will not exceed the tire   s load carrying capacity if you  adhere to the loading conditions  tire size  and cold tire  inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading  Information placard and in the    Vehic
215. r side marker     Taillamp  Tail Stop Lamp    For bulb replacement  see your authorized dealer     Rear Turn Signal Lamp    For bulb replacement  see your authorized dealer     Backup Lamps    1  Reach behind the rear bumper and press the release  tabs on the backup lamp housing     2  Separate the backup lamp housing from the rear  bumper fascia     3  Disconnect the electrical harness connector     4  Turn the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise   and then pull it out of the backup lamp assembly     5  Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install  the replacement bulb     6  Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the backup  lamp assembly  and then turn it clockwise     7  Reinstall the backup lamp housing into the rear bum   per fascia     NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295    FLUID CAPACITIES       U S  Metric  Fuel  Approximate  16 Gallons 60 6 Liters  Engine Oil With Filter  8 4 Liter Engine   We recommend you use SAE 0W 40  11 Quarts 10 4 Liters  API Certified   Transmission  8 4 Liter Engine   We recommend you use MOPAR   3 4 Quarts 3 2 Liters  ATF 4   Automatic Transmission Fluid   Rear Axle   We recommend you use Castrol SAF XJ SAE 75W 140 1 5 Quarts 1 4 Liters  Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant   Cooling System     8 4 Liter Engine   We recommend you use MOPAR   16 Quarts 15 Liters  Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile For   mula or equivalent       Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level                          
216. rake  booster  the ABS pump will run when applying the brake  and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop     The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac   ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic  system  A leak in either half of the dual brake system is  indicated by the Brake Warning Light  which will turn on  when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has  dropped below a specified level     The light will remain on until the cause is corrected     WARNING     Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is    dangerous  Part of the brake system may have failed   It will take longer to stop the vehicle  You could have  a collision  Have the vehicle checked immediately        Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System   ABS   are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force  Distribution  EBD   In the event of an EBD failure  the  Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS  Light  Immediate repair to the ABS system is required     Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by  cycling the ignition from the OFF position to the ON   RUN position  The light should illuminate for approxi   mately two seconds  The light should then turn off unless    130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL    the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected   If the light does not illuminate  have the light inspected  by an authorized dealer     The light also will turn on when the parking brake is  applied with t
217. ramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be  performed at an authorized dealer    General Information    The Sentry Key  system complies with FCC rules Part 15  and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada  Operation is  subject to the following conditions       This device may not cause harmful interference       This device must accept any interference that may be  received  including interference that may cause unde   sired operation     18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE    VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM    The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors  liftgate   and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for  unauthorized operation  If something triggers the alarm   the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from  starting  It will also sound the horn and flash the park  lights  and taillights     Rearming of the System    If something triggers the alarm  and no action is taken to  disarm it  the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the  horn after three minutes  turn off all of the visual signals   flashing lights  after 15 minutes  and then rearm itself     To Arm The System  Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm     1  Make sure the vehicle ignition system is the  OFF   position     2  Perform one of the following methods to lock the  vehicle     Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with  the driver and or passenger door open     Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitt
218. ran llus  259                                                                   Maintenance Free Battery                 260  Hibernation Mode                  s s  262  Air Conditioner Maintenance               263    Body Lubrication  Wiper Blades        iese ee ee ee ee ee ee    Adding Washer Fluid                    266  Exhaust System sosego traat iese sman das 266  Cooling System    oonan ee EE EE Ee ee ee 269  M Brake System 4 2445  PER RR e pidge aes 274    Manual Transmission                00  277       252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed                                        Hydraulie Clutch    om emm ees 278   Reat AXle   cia  ei ae be ee e me eR E En 278   Appearance Care And Protection From   COFfOSIOfl  inea vA RR E E eee 279  E FUSES TE EE EE 4 oes 284   Power Distribution Center                 284  B VEHICLE STORAGE esse kes ES KEN Reg 290  B REPLACEMENT BULBS sissies steke ds ie 292  W BULB REPLACEMENT ies oes RE SERE ES 293                Front Headlamp  Front Park  Turn Signal  Lamp Lec ce A BEER EDE ERSTES 293                                        Front Rear Side Marker Lamp              293  Taillamp  Tail Stop Lamp                 294  Rear Turn Signal Lamp                   294  Backup Lamps    294  B FLUID CAPACITIES 222254542240 ed RE Ra 295  E FLUIDS  LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE  PARTS saa ER ede V drach ood EU ELSES 296  EDGING 20 oh TE EE RR e 296  Chassis  ie aped tec aote sd edic GE arse 297                MAINTAINING Y
219. re to do so can lead to brake  failure  and an accident        E STARTING AND OPERATING 193    BRAKE SYSTEM    Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic  BRAKE brake systems  If either of the two hydraulic   systems loses normal capability  the remaining   system will still function  However  there will  be some loss of overall braking effectiveness  You may  notice increased pedal travel during application  greater  pedal force required to slow or stop  and potential  activation of the    Brake System Warning Light        In the event power assist is lost for any reason  i e   repeated brake applications with the engine off  the  brakes will still function  However  the effort required to  brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required  with the power system operating     Brake Pad Break In    NOTE  Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor   mance braking system  The brake pads are a semi   metallic compound  which offer superior fade resistance  for consistent operation  A compromise to using this type  of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under  certain weather and operating conditions   ie   during  light brake applications      The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long  break in period  However  you should avoid repeated  hard brake applications from high speeds during initial  break in  In addition  you should avoid severe brake  loading  such as may be encountered when descending  long mountain grades     194 STARTING AND OPER
220. reet Mode     This mode will give a sporty  but  comfortable ride  Within this mode  the suspension  will adapt to the vehicle inputs  including vehicle       speed  braking and acceleration  This mode is driver  selectable when the vehicle is placed in STREET mode   press the    STREET    button on the Instrument Panel    This mode will set suspension for maximum perfor   mance handling and is intended for a smoother ride on  the various types of pavement and road conditions  while still providing damping levels appropriate ex   treme capabilities     Race Mode     This mode is driver selectable when the  vehicle is placed in RACE mode  press the    RACE     button on the Instrument Panel   This mode is for track  use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires     NOTE  The RACE setting will provide a firmer ride       When RACE mode is enabled  a Shock symbol with     RACE    next to it will light up in the instrument  cluster     184 STARTING AND OPERATING M    LAUNCH MODE   IF EQUIPPED    This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight  line racing     1     Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface  with the engine running       Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving     Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear    position       Press and release the    LAUNCH    Button  Located on    the steering wheel controls         STARTING AND OPERATING 185  6  Release the clutch     Pressing the launch control button when launch cont
221. requency signal from the hand held transmitter  Re   lease both buttons after the indicator light changes  from slow to rapid       At the garage door opener motor  in the garage      locate the    LEARN    or    TRAINING    button  This can  usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is  attached to the garage door opener device motor     Firmly press and release the    LEARN    or    TRAIN   ING    button  On some garage door openers devices  there may be a light that blinks when the garage door  opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode     NOTE  You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next  step after the LEARN button has been pressed     6  Return to the vehicle and press the programmed  HomeLink   button twice  holding the button for two  seconds each time   If the garage door opener device  activates  programming is complete     NOTE  If the garage door opener device does not acti   vate  press the button a third time  for two seconds  to  complete the training     To program the remaining two HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the channels        110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEE    Reprogramming A Single HomeLink   Button    To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps     T  2     Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     Press and hold the desired HomeLink   button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds  Do  not rel
222. ricant  use only  the manufacturer   s recommended axle lubricant  Refer to     Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in    Maintaining  Your Vehicle    for further information     NEE ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279    CAUTION     Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom     mended fluid may cause a shudder noise issue  refer  to    Fluids Lubes and Genuine Parts    in     Maintain   ing Your Vehicle    for further information        Change Axle Lubricant    Refer to    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper mainte   nance intervals  Change the lubricant immediately if  contaminated with water  See your authorized dealer for  service     Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion  Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion    Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo   graphic locations and usage  Chemicals that make roads  passable in snow and ice  and chemicals that are sprayed  on trees and road surfaces during other seasons  are    highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle  Outside  parking  which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami   nants  road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated   extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi   tions will have an adverse effect on paint  metal trim  and  underbody protection     The following maintenance recommendations will enable  you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  resistance built into your vehicle     Washing  e Wash your vehicle regularly  Always wash your ve   hicle
223. rol is  active will deactivate launch control also shifting the  vehicle into second gear will disable the system      NOTE     e Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch  RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch   Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve  controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration       g 058372615 through first gear   LAUNCH Button e Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic  5  Press the accelerator pedal to the floor  Stability Control  ESC  Modes     NOTE  If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all  conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is  pressed to the floor quickly  within approximately 1 2  second  the system will hold the engine speed to a preset  speed  below the engine rev limiter speed      186 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES    Acceleration    WARNING     Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous   You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly    have a collision  Accelerate slowly and carefully  whenever there is likely to be poor traction  ice   snow  wet  mud  loose sand  etc          Traction    When driving on wet or slushy roads  it is possible for a  wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  surface  This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or  complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability  To  reduce this possibility  the following precautions should  be observed     1  Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are 
224. s  CAUTION     sion  Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete    stop before shifting into REVERSE  Failure to do so  may result in transmission damage        182 STARTING AND OPERATING ME    Recommended Shift Speeds    To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it  should be upshifted as listed below  Shift at the vehicle  speeds listed for acceleration  Earlier upshifts during  cruise conditions  relatively steady speeds  will result in  increased fuel economy  and may be used as indicated           MANUAL TRANSMISSION  RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS  1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6    mph   15   2   40   45   50     km h     24     40     64     72     80                             Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired  acceleration rate        Skip Shift Indicator Light    There are times when you must shift the trans   mission directly from first gear into fourth gear  instead of from first gear into second gear  This  is to help you get the best possible fuel  economy from your vehicle  This occurs when engine  coolant is higher than 107 F  42 C   and vehicle speed is  greater than 16 mph  26 km h  but less than 18 mph   29 km h   and engine speed is less than 1 650 RPM  and  the transmission is in first gear  and the accelerator is at  20  throttle or less  The    Skip Shift Indicator Light   located in the tachometer will illuminate during these  times     When the  Skip Shift Indicator Light  illuminates  the  shift mechanism will only allow shifts from 
225. s seen in the passenger side  convex mirror will look smaller and farther away  than they really are  Relying too much on your       passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with  another vehicle or other object  Use your inside  mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle  seen in the passenger side mirror        Power Mirrors       The power mirror controls are located on the driver side    door tim panel Power Mirror Controls    The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but   tons and a four way mirror control switch  To adjust a  mirror  press either the L  left  or R  right  to select the  mirror that you want to adjust     NOTE  A light in the selected button will illuminate  indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79    Using the mirror control switch  press on any of the four  arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to  move     Vanity Mirror       A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor  To use  the mirror  rotate the sun visor downward and swing the  mirror cover upward        030471338    Vanity Mirror    80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN  SEATS Manual Seats    Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Forward and Rearward Adjustment    velle The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat  near the floor     Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear      WARNING  ward  Release the bar once the s
226. se Mini Fuse Description  3     40 Amp Green     Rad Fan  4 o  40 Amp Green     Rad Fan Rly High  5     40 Amp Green     ABS ESP Pump Feed  6 x 40 Amp Green     Starter  7     40 Amp Green     CBC  Ext  Lighting  1   8     40 Amp Green     CBC  Ext  Lighting  2   9     30 Amp Pink     CBC  Int  Lighting  washer   10     30 Amp Pink     CBC  Power Lock   11     Jumper Black   B  Jumper  12     25 Amp Natural       ABS ESP Valve Feed  13         20 Amp Horn  Yellow  14         10 Amp Red A C Clutch  15         10 Amp Red Diagnostic  Mirror  Fuel Door  Stop Switch  16         15 Amp Blue KIN  RF Hub             286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed                                           Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description  17         25 Amp circuit Power Seats  breaker  18     30 Amp Pink     Driver Door Mod  19   30 Amp Pink     Passenger Door Mod  20     30 Amp Pink     EBL  21     20 Amp Blue     Wiper  22             B  Jumper  23     Jumper Black     B  Jumper  24       25 Amp Natural   PCM  Powertrain Control Module  25         25 Amp Natural   Fuel Pump  26         20 Amp ASD  1  Yellow  27         20 Amp Yellow   ASD  2  28             Spare  29     40 Amp Green     HVAC Blower                                                                NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287  Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description   30     20 Amp Yellow     RR Power Outlet  Adj  Pedals  UCI  31             B  Jumper   32     Jumper Black  
227. ses em m eges 219  Tire Markings se iia e iR a x rr ERR A dee 202 Replacement Tires sce mic ie EE Ese EE EE ee 219  Tire Identification Number  TIN             206 Tire Storage mele eR  DR EER RE eus 221  Tire Terminology And Definitions           207 TIRE CHAINS  TRACTION DEVICES         221  Tire Loading And Tire Pressure             209 ME SNOW TIRES              BR 221    M TIRES     GENERAL INFORMATION          214 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS       221                                                                ll TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM  TPMS    223  Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure  Wamings  o  sensisse P UE eee BEN EE 223   M FUEL REQUIREMENTS                0   225  BAL ENNE  on sies mee Re REY Rs 225  Reformulated Gasoline                   225  Gasoline Oxygenate Blends               226  E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles         226  MMT In Gasoline       EE se 227  Materials Added To Fuel                  227    Fuel System Cautions                00  227       Carbon Monoxide Warnings    ADDING FUEL                Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release           ll TRAILER TOWING    ll RECREATIONAL TOWING  BEHIND  MOTORHOME  ETC      Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle   Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The  Ground     E GROUND CLEARANCE                   Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 175       176 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION     Before starting your vehicle  adjust your se
228. side door handle     NOTE  None of the courtesy lights will operate if the  dimmer control is in the    defeat    position  extreme  downward position   unless the overhead map reading  lights are turned on manually     REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY  RKE     The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors  and liftgate  or activate the Panic Alarm from distances  up to approximately 200 ft  60 m  using a hand held Key  Fob with RKE transmitter  The RKE transmitter does not  need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system           021371495    Key Fob With RKE Transmitter  To Unlock The Doors    Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE  transmitter once to unlock the driver   s door or twice to  unlock both doors and the liftgate  The park lights and  turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal  and the illuminated entry system will turn on  refer to    THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21       Uconnect   Access Programmable Settings    in    Under   standing Your Instrument Panel    for further information     Remote Key Unlock  Driver Door Both Doors First    This feature lets you program the system to unlock either  the driver   s door or all doors on the first press of the  UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter  To change the  current setting  refer to    Uconnect   Access Settings    in     Understanding Your Instrument Panel    for further in   formation     Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock    This feature lets you program the system t
229. slushy     2  Slow down if road has standing water or puddles     CAUTION     Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds    over 5 mph  8 km h   may cause water to be ingested  into the engine  This can cause severe engine dam   age        3  Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become  visible     4  Keep tires properly inflated     5  Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and  the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden  stop     Eed STARTING AND OPERATING 187  DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water    Driving through water more than a few inches  Although your vehicle is capable of driving through  centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water  consider the following Caution  safety and prevent damage to your vehicle  and Warning before doing so     Flowing Rising Water CAUTION   WARNING     Do not drive on or across a road or path where water  is flowing and or rising  as in storm run off   Flow   ing water can wear away the road or path   s surface    e Always check the depth of the standing water  before driving through it  Never drive through  standing water that is deeper than the bottom of  the tire rims mounted on the vehicle       Determine the condition of the road or the path  that is under water and if there are any obstacles in  the way before driving through the standing water    e Do not exceed 5 mph  8 km h  when driving  through standing water  This will minimize wave  effects     and
230. soft key the following settings  will be available    e Display Mode   When in this display you may select one of the auto  display settings  To change Mode status  touch and    release the Day  Night or Auto soft key  Then touch the  arrow back soft key     e Display Brightness With Headlights ON    When in this display  you may select the brightness with  the headlights on  Adjust the brightness with the   and      setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale  between the   and   soft keys  Then touch the arrow back  soft key       Display Brightness With Headlights OFF    When in this display  you may select the brightness with  the headlights off  Adjust the brightness with the   and    setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale  between the   and   soft keys  Then touch the arrow back  soft key     e Set Language  When in this display  you may select one of three  languages for all display nomenclature  including the trip    functions and the navigation system  if equipped   Touch  the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired    NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155    language soft key until a check mark appears next to the  language  showing that setting has been selected  Touch  the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu     e Units    When in this display  you may select to have the EVIC   odometer  and navigation system  if equipped  changed  between US and Metric units of measure  Touch US or  Metric until a check
231. splay in the vehicle odometer  The    ESC OFF       E STARTING AND OPERATING 201    message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Informa   tion Center  EVIC   Refer to    Electronic Vehicle Informa   tion Center  EVIC     in    Understanding Your Instrument  Panel    for further information  To turn ESC ON again   momentarily press the    ESC Off    switch     WARNING     With the ESC switched OFF  the enhanced vehicle  stability offered by ESC is unavailable  In an emer     gency evasive maneuver  the ESC system will not  engage to assist in maintaining stability  The    Full  Off    ESC mode is intended for off highway or off   road only     Sport Mode    Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced  stability control  To enter the    Sport Mode    mode  press  the    ESC    switch once  located on the steering wheel         The    ESC Sport Light    will illuminate  and the  ESC  SPORT    message will display in the vehicle odometer   Refer to    Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC      in    Understanding Your Instrument Panel    for further  information     Track Mode    Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced  stability control  To enter the    Track Mode    mode  press  the    ESC    switch twice  The    ESC Track Light    will  illuminate  and the  ESC TRACK    message will display in  the vehicle odometer  Refer to    Electronic Vehicle Infor   mation Center  EVIC     in    Understanding Your Instru   ment Panel    for further information   
232. ssed while in the delay range  the wiper will  operate for several seconds after the washer knob is    NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97    released  It will then resume the intermittent interval  previously selected  If the washer knob is pushed while  in the off position  the wiper will turn on and cycle  approximately three times after the wash knob is re   leased     To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system  in cold weather  select a solution or mixture that meets or  exceeds the temperature range of your climate  This  rating information can be found on most washer fluid  containers     WARNING     Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield  could lead to a collision  You might not see other    vehicles or other obstacles  To avoid sudden icing of  the windshield during freezing weather  warm the  windshield with the defroster before and during  windshield washer use        Headlights On With Wipers  Available with  Automatic Headlights Only     When this feature is active  the headlights will turn on  approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on  if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position  In  addition  the headlights will turn off when the wipers are  turned off if they were turned on by this feature     NOTE  The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be  turned on or off using the Uconnect   System  refer to     Uconnect   Settings    in    Understanding Your Instru   ment Panel    for further information     T
233. sting Procedure       39                                                                Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System     BeltAlert    is gcc ee pierde Rn Reges d 40  Automatic Locking Retractor Mode  ALR       It Bquipped ende er ARE YT A1  Seat Belt Pretensioners     If Equipped         42  Seat Belts and Pregnant Women             42  Seat Belt Extender       ee ee se ese 42  Driver And Passenger Supplemental Restraint  System  SRS      Air Bags              0   43  Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls        48  Event Data Recorder  EDR                  59  Child Restraints                0000000  60  ll  BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS             67    Ned THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11                               B SAFETY TIPS iceri meraga eee RR 68 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The  3 Veh  cle  s As DE RR EER E RES bd 69  Transporting Passengers       ees ss Ee 68  Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside            Exhaust Gas      ses ss es 68       The Vehicle  ii ve staves ere ENE Adan ines 70    12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEE ed    A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS    Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system  This system  consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry  RKE   transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node  KIN      Keyless Enter N Go    Feature    This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go     feature   refer to  Keyless Enter N Go  in  Things To  Know Before Starting Your
234. straint             0 000 000  00004 60  Extend ef s  iae RE dentate nas waren 42  Inspection   odo sedes ee d whee Ss ooo 69  Operating Instructions               00005  36  PretenslOners  eresse anaes mae hades Re ere 42  Untwisting Procedure                 00004 39    en INDEX 339    EE ene aa OER OPE 80  AGJUSHMENE as EE ee Ee Ee E Rade dale s 80  Reclining    20s er pepe ER 82   Security Alarm  Theft Alarm                    18   Selection of Coolant  Antifreeze              LL  296   Selection  of Oll  ere s e eret are s 258   Sentry Key  Immobilizer         ees ee ee se ee 15   Sentry Key Programming       ee ee ee es ee 17   Sentry Key Replacement   seses EE ee ee 16   Service Assistance         sse 319   Service  Contract i  sese sm RR ree des 321    Service Engine Soon Light  Malfunction Indicator     132    Service Manuals          llli  323  Shift Indicator Light            llle 182  Shift Speeds  ii css een e EE BL RR o ades 179  Shoulder Belts ii sry rg EA es 34  Signals  TUTA a ocak e eoe te ERR rec Rs 7  Snow Chains  Tire Chains         EE SE ee 221    Snow TITeS  Hu ae hbase SR ads EE ES ha E o 221    Speed Control  Cruise Control              lius  101  Speedometer onsa Sih eos dnte idea e eir hehe nis 127  Sport Mode     scie ego RIA EER DER 137  Statin ica ar eh bo ERROR RR ER 176  Emergency  Jump Starting                   245  Engine Fails to Start        oe ee ee ee ee ee sike 178  Starting and Operating s e ecs see EE EE ee 176  Starting Procedures   
235. sys   tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure  as intended  TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety  of reasons  including the installation of replacement or  alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  TPMS from functioning properly  Always check the  TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more  tires or wheels on your vehicle  to ensure that the       132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS  to continue to function properly     CAUTION     The TPMS has been optimized for the original  equipment tires and wheels  TPMS pressures and  warning have been established for the tire size  equipped on your vehicle  Undesirable system opera     tion or sensor damage may result when using re   placement equipment that is not of the same size   type  and or style  Aftermarket wheels can cause  sensor damage  Do not use tire sealant from a can or  balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a  TPMS  as damage to the sensors may result        13  Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL     LS  The Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL  is part of  an onboard diagnostic system  called OBD  that    monitors engine control systems  The light will illumi   nate when the ignition is in the ON RUN position   before engine start  If the bulb does not come on when  cycling the ignition from OFF to ON RUN  have the  condition checked promptly     Certain conditions  s
236. system for  this vehicle     The Occupant Classification Module  OCM  is located  underneath the passenger seat  The OCM uses input  from the Flex Mat to classify the occupant in the passen   ger seat into a size category  The OCM communicates this       52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEE ed    information to the ORC  The ORC may modify the rate of  passenger Air Bag inflation or prevent passenger Ad   vanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant  classification     If there is a fault present in the OCS  the Air Bag Warning  Light will turn on  This indicates that you should take the  vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately   The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever there  is a fault present  which can affect the operation of the Air  Bag system  If there is a fault present in the OCS  both the  PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will  illuminate to show that the passenger Air Bag is turned  off  Should this occur the passenger Air Bag would  remain off until the fault is cleared  If an object is lodged  under the seat and interferes with operation of the Flex  Mat  a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD  Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light  Once the  lodged object is removed  the fault will be cleared auto   matically after a short period     Passenger Air Bag Disabled  PAD  Indicator Light    The Passenger Air Bag Disabled  PAD  Indicator Light  indicates to the driver and p
237. t  is ees se cee vag dae seas ee cane 92  Intermittent Wipers  Delay Wipers                95  Introductioti     ss iese hee RE te BREER ER E 4  Jump Starting    ceca eR reece eee ee 245  AR SR ooh eerte tes Gh odes 12  Key In Reminder            llle 14  Keyless Entry System    terna deastek ianiai 12  Keyless Gor 25e ku c3 eur NES Re NR EE es 12  Key  Programming iss ss ae aay eda y d 17    Key  Replacement  ss   zs edem ae esas 16  Key  Sentry  Immobilizer  serait anapa aE 15  Knee Bolster erer 804 Aa DA RD end 43  Lane Change and Turn Signals                  91  Lap Shoulder Belts              000000000004 34  Latches 23 Iere BOERE ES ERA dd ES 71   Hood    iiem eae akiri nacer ERU Es 85  Latch  Plate  sap RE NR GE YES ea 36  Lead Free Gasoline             llle  225  Leaks  Fluid  ie e084 Ge ad RR RR E bee 71  Lite Of Tires  scs siue D EER Geena bo EE ERE 219  Liftgate   esee TE ea aia eS 30  Light Bulbs  scc ees Ese RE eee EE m en 71  LightSr  ou od lade EO FEE EE d 71   Airbag si od EE eg doo oe  Ee 59   PATI  EE aes ara OUT ea ee E 130   AMAL OC eers aec REED 137    Automatic Headlights    Brake Warning cees acid ace e Rom sse 128  Bulb Replaceme  nt erste aii kr ated Rag deeds 292  GUSE s i4 od edu a p I de d epe rir 133  Daytime Running sass sa ss ee i taah e eee 90  Dimmer Switch  Headlight                   90  EXC TIOR e iia a paces alee aos ae SO aOR i deg OR ee 71  Hazard Warning Flasher                    234  Headlights  us ies xS RR EE RE ieee 88  Headlights
238. t Hose  6     assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos   sible  Refer to     F  Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace   ment        NOTE  When having the tire serviced  advise the autho   rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed  using the TIREFIT service kit     Ned WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 245     F  Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement  6  Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end    x of the Sealant Hose  6  and return the hose to its  A Hose  6   clear imcolor  storage area  located on the bottom of the air pump    2  Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the    AA Rd under ho sealant bots 7  Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the    vehicle   3  Press the Sealant Bottle release button  The Sealant  Bottle  1  will pop up  Remove the bottle and dispose JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES    of it accordingly  WARNING     4  Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous   ing  e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when     ever the hood is raised  It can start anytime the  ignition switch is ON  You can be hurt by the fan     5  Position the new Sealant Bottle  1  in the housing so  that the Sealant Hose  6  aligns with the hose slot in  the front of the housing  Press the bottle into the  housing  An audible click will be heard indicating the  bottle is locked into place         Continued        246 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  NOTE  The battery is located underneath an access  panel inside the rear compar
239. ted gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe   cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im   prove air quality     The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso   lines  Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro   vide excellent performance and durability of engine and  fuel system components     226 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss    Gasoline Oxygenate Blends    Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy   genates such as Ethanol  Fuels blended with oxygenates  may be used in your vehicle     CAUTION     DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso   line containing more than 10  Ethanol  Use of these  blends may result in starting and driveability prob     lems  damage critical fuel system components  cause  emissions to exceed the applicable standard  and or  cause the    Malfunction Indicator Light    to illumi   nate  Pump labels should clearly communicate if a  fuel contains greater than 10  Ethanol        Problems that result from using gasoline containing  Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10  Ethanol  are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may  not be covered under warranty     E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles    Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain   ing 10  ethanol  E10   Gasoline with higher ethanol  content may void the vehicle   s warranty     If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85  fuel  the engine will have some or all of these symptoms       operate in a lean mode   e OBD
240. ter   Driver Advanced Front Air Bag  Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  Front Impact Sensors    Front Seat Belt Pretensioners  Seat Belt Buckle Switch   and Seat Track Position Sensors    Occupant Classification System  OCS       Occupant Classification Module  OCM   e Passenger Air Bag Disable  PAD  Indicator Light  e Flex Mat    Knee Impact Bolsters    The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the  driver and the passenger  and position front occupants  for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air  Bags     Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls  The following requirements must be strictly adhered to       Do not modify the passenger seat assembly or compo   nents in any way       Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not  designated for the specific model being repaired  Al   ways use the correct seat cover specified for the  vehicle     NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49      Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat  cover       Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those  approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar       e At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System   SRS  component or SRS related component or fastener  be modified or replaced with any part except those  which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar       Occupant Restraint Controller  ORC     The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system  required for this vehicle     The ORC determines if deployment of the front Air Bags in  a
241. th or serious injury to the  front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli   sion  A modified vehicle may not comply with re   quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards  FM     VSS  and or Canadian Motor  Standards  CMVSS      Vehicle Safety    Enhanced Accident Response System    In the event of an impact causing Air Bag deployment  if  the communication network remains intact  and the  power remains intact  depending on the nature of the       Cut off fuel to the engine     Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or  until the ignition is cycled to OFF     Turn on the interior lights  which remain on as long as  the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled to  OFF     Unlock the doors automatically     If A Deployment Occurs    The front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately  after deployment     NOTE  Front Air Bags will not deploy in all collisions   This does not mean something is wrong with the Air Bag  system     Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57    If you do have a collision  which deploys the Air Bags   any or all of the following may occur       The nylon Air Bag material may sometimes cause  abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and  front passenger as the Air Bags deploy and unfold  The  abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those  you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium  floor  They are not caused by contact with chemicals   They are not permanent and normally heal quickly   Howe
242. the engine oil and engine oil filter   T Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires    filter  H Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    J Rotate tires  T Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary   11 Change the rear axle fluid  H Inspect the exhaust system    H Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary        HA Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary              Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                304 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ss                                  30 000 Miles  50 000 km  or 36 000 Miles  60 000 km  or 36 Months Maintenance Service  30 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule  1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   Q Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires   filter  T Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    J Rotate tires  T Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary   T Replace the engine air cleaner filter  H Change the rear axle fluid   T Adjust parking brake on vehicles H Change the manual transmission fluid   equipped with four wheel disc T Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  brakes  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if ne
243. the other tire pressure value     e If the Tire Pressure system requires service     Service  Tire Pressure System    is displayed     Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be  reset  Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return  to the main menu     Refer to    Tire Pressure Monitoring System  IPMS    under    Starting and Operating    for further information     Coolant Temperature    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Coolant Temperature    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press  and release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant  temperature will be displayed        148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE    Oil Temperature    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Oil Temperature    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and the oil temperature  will be displayed     Battery Voltage    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Battery Voltage    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and the battery voltage  will be displayed     Intake Air Temp     Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Intake Air Temp     is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and the intake air  temperature will be displayed     Current Torque    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Current Torque    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and the c
244. tic converter damage  and power loss will soon occur  Immediate service is  required     EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  PROGRAMS    In some localities  it may be a legal requirement to pass  an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system   Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration     C      For states that require an Inspection and Mainte   nance  I M   this check verifies the    Malfunction    NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255    Indicator Light  MIL     is functioning and is not on when  the engine is running  and that the OBD II system is  ready for testing     Normally  the OBD II system will be ready  The OBD II  system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently  serviced  recently had a dead battery or a battery replace   ment  If the OBD II system should be determined not  ready for the I M test  your vehicle may fail the test     Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test   which you can use prior to going to the test station  To  check if your vehicle   s OBD II system is ready  you must  do the following     1  Turn the ignition switch to the ON position  but do not  crank or start the engine     2  If you crank or start the engine  you will have to start  this test over     3  As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON  position  you will see the MIL symbol come on as part  of a normal bulb check     4  Approximately 15 seconds later  one of two things will  happen     e The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then 
245. tire specifications or capability  Failure to use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings  equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the approved for your vehicle     safety  handling  and ride of your vehicle  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  capacity  other than what was originally equipped  on your vehicle  Using a tire with a smaller load  index could result in tire overloading and failure   You could lose control and have a collision         Continued     Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 221    WARNING   Continued  TIRE CHAINS  TRACTION DEVICES     e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Due to limited clearance  tire chains or traction devices    adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire   are not recommended   failure and loss of vehicle control     CAUTION   CAUTION     Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are  used        Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  may result in false speedometer and odometer read  SNOW TIRES  ings        There are no snow tires that are compatible with the  Tire Storage wheels on this vehicle     Tire storage is addressed in the Pirelli Limited Tire  IRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS  Warranty Booklet     Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at  different loads and perform different steering  driving   and braking functions  For these reasons  they wear at  unequal rates     Specific recommendations on guidelines for long term  tire storage for this vehi
246. tment on the left side of the  e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it   vehicle  A remote battery terminal is located in the engine  started  Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans  compartment for jump starting   axle cannot be started this way and may be dam   aged  Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con   verter and once the engine has started  ignite and  damage the converter and vehicle  If the vehicle  has a discharged battery  booster cables may be  used to obtain a start from another vehicle  This  type of start can be dangerous if done improperly   so follow this procedure carefully   Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry  such as watch bands or bracelets that might make  an inadvertent electrical contact  You could be  seriously injured           Battery Location         Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry  such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an  inadvertent electrical contact       When boost is provided by a battery in another  vehicle  park that vehicle within booster cable reach   but without allowing the vehicles touch one another       Set the parking brake  place the transmission in NEU   TRAL  and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles       Turn off the heater  radio  and all unnecessary electri   cal loads       Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the  remote jump start positive post     in the engine  compartment  Refer to the following illustration for  remote jump starting connectio
247. to reach  the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the  ground  This will provide the best positioning of the kit    4  Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw  the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose  6  onto the  valve stem     Ned WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 241    5  Uncoil the Power Plug  8  and insert the plug into the  vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet     NOTE  Do not remove foreign objects  e g   screws or  nails  from the tire      C  Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated  Tire     e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE   FIT kit     NOTE  Manual transmission vehicles must have the  parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL     e After pressing the Power Button  4   the sealant  white  fluid  will flow from the Sealant Bottle  1  through the  Sealant Hose  6  and into the tire     NOTE  Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the  tire     If the sealant  white fluid  does not flow within 0   10  seconds through the Sealant Hose  6      1  Press the Power Button  4  to turn Off the TIREFIT kit   Disconnect the Sealant Hose  6  from the valve stem   Make sure the valve stem is free of debris  Reconnect  the Sealant Hose  6  to the valve stem  Check that the  Mode Select Knob  5  is in the Sealant Mode position  and not Air Mode  Press the Power Button  4  to turn  On the TIREFIT kit     2  Connect the Power Plug  8  to a different 12 Volt    power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle  if  available  Make sure th
248. tructions such as leaves  Leaves  collected in the air intake may reduce airflow  can cause  odor  and if they enter the plenum they could plug the  water drains  In Winter months make sure the air intake  is clear of ice  slush and snow     172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions    WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS    HOT WEATHER  gt  5  Lnd  AND VEHICLE Start vehicle and put Mode Control in    HER SP position and turn on A C  Set Fan Control to High   Roll windows down to flush out hot air  Roll  windows up after hot air is flushed out    Turn Mode Control to  jw   and set Fan and  Temp Knobs as desired once car has cooled     Set the Mode Control to  2   position and turn  A C on in sunny weather  Choose the  pa     position for cloudy or dark conditions with A C on     Set the Mode Control to position and turn  6 ean the A C on in sunny weather  Choose meld   6 666 position and turn on the A C in cloudy or dark    646   E conditions     CONDITIONS Use the position in sunny weather  the   at   position in cloudy or dark weather     4   Mode Knob setting for snowy or    NS very cold weather that requires extra heat to the  windshield   815193c4             STARTING AND OPERATING                                                                                     CONTENTS   B STARTING PROCEDURES is is sy m Res 176 W  DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES           186  Normal Starting    scs s ex xe ves 176 Acceleratiof aia tes 4 tee
249. ts that leave the pedal  area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that  they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the  pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other  ways     Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside  The Vehicle    Tires    Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear  patterns  Check for stones  nails  glass  or other objects  lodged in the tread  Inspect the tread and sidewall for  cuts and cracks  Check the wheel nuts for tightness   Check the tires for proper pressure     Ed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71    Lights    Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and  exterior lights while you work the controls  Check turn  signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument  panel     Door Latches  Check for positive closing  latching  and locking   Fluid Leaks    Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel   engine coolant  oil  or other fluid leaks  Also  if gasoline  fumes are detected or if fuel  power steering fluid  or  brake fluid leaks are suspected  the cause should be  located and corrected immediately        UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE                                              CONTENTS   B MIRRORS        EG ee 76  Automatic Dimming Mirror                76  Outside Mirrors          issar u KUSEN 77  Power Mirrors 4252 3    da EORR RE ee 78  Vanity Mirror        lesse 79   a SEATS 21 16 pikie sdb TRUE Pe DS 80  Manual Seats    regester dia eae 
250. ttery     NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 249    13  Disconnect the positive     jumper cable from the  positive     post of the booster battery     14  Disconnect the positive     end of the jumper cable  from the remote positive     post of the discharged  vehicle     If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle  you should have the battery and charging system in   spected at your authorized dealer     CAUTION     Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets  draw power from the vehicle   s battery  even when not  in use  ie  cellular phones  etc   Eventually  if    plugged in long enough without engine operation   the vehicle   s battery will discharge sufficiently to  degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from  starting        FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE    If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud  sand  or snow  it  can often be moved using a rocking motion  Turn your  steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the  front wheels  Then shift back and forth between 2nd gear  and REVERSE  while gently pressing the accelerator  Use  the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking  motion  without spinning the wheels  or racing the  engine     CAUTION     e When    rocking    a stuck vehicle by shifting be     tween 2nd gear and REVERSE  do not spin the  wheels faster than 15 mph  24 km h   or drivetrain  damage may result         Continued        250 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE    CAUTION   Continued  TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE    e Revvi
251. ture as  required by Federal safety standards  This includes  most garage door opener models manufactured  after 1982  Do not use a garage door opener without   NOTE   these safety features  Call toll free 1 800 355 3515  or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for  safety information or assistance    Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide  a dan    gerous gas  Do not run your vehicle in the garage   while programming the transceiver  Exhaust gas     The term IC before the certification registration num    can cause serious injury or death  ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci   fications were met       This device must accept any interference that may be  received including interference that may cause unde   sired operation     e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC  and IC rules  Changes or modifications not expressly  approved by the party responsible for compliance could  void the user s authority to operate the device           ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS    Your vehicle is eguipped with two 12 Volt  13 Amp   power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones   small electronics and other low powered electrical acces   sories     One power outlet is located on the center console to the  right of the shifter  Push down on the power outlet to  access the opening  Push down on it again to close  This  power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON  or ACC position        UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115    The s
252. ty uud EE EE Rep rs 202  SIZES pn dura a NR Paine RO NE BURG dorus 204  Snow Wires se 6656 98 446 DER RR genae RR bodes 221  OPINIE voa EER Sis dea oed  gt  EE EN i 217  el MP P 221  Tread Wear Indicators               lll  218  Tire Safety Information            llle 202  TOWING s esci Gee deer dux REED s 230  Disabled Vehicle               SE ES Es a 250  Recreational          00  irer ee ee ee 231  TEaCtlOD  5 4  wack dmx head bans HS ale GES des 186  Traction Control        SS ee 198  Trailer TOWiNg ses Eie a oe yee as vem ae oe 230  Transmission    0 0 0 0    ee eee 277  PUIG sare aster aos EE II SE IE ORE 297    Ed INDEX 341    Shifting  Transmitter Battery Service  Remote Keyless Entry       23  Transmitter Programming  Remote Keyless Entry       23    Transmitter  Remote Keyless Entry  RKE            20  Transporting  Pets    ee tr ME weed e Edd 67  Tread Wear Indicators           selle 218  T  rn Signals        ek 6 Panda Pr Redes d Puedes 91  Uniform Tire Quality Grades                0   325  Universal Transmitter                  000   106  Unleaded Gasoline    225  Untwisting Procedure  Seat Belt                 39  Upholstery Care    cese Ee ona Bel ah Ge ena 281  Vanity Mirrors    uaa bre hee EX ER PR 79  Vehicle Identification Number  VIN                6  Vehicl   Loading   aue Dt apros 210  Vehicle Modifications  Alterations                 7    Vehicle Storage    coated ea erre ER Eu 171    Vehicle Theft Alarm  Security Alarm              18  Vinyl Trims PP
253. uch as poor fuel quality  etc   may  illuminate the MIL after engine start  The vehicle should  be serviced if the light stays on through several of your  typical driving cycles  In most situations  the vehicle will  drive normally and will not require towing     CAUTION     Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator  Light  MIL  on could cause damage to the engine    control system  It also could affect fuel economy and  drivability  If the MIL is flashing  severe catalytic  converter damage and power loss will soon occur   Immediate service is required           UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133    WARNING  e Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator    This light will turn on when the electronic  A malfunctioning catalytic converter  as referenced O speed control is SET  For further information   above  can reach higher temperatures than in normal    refer to    Electronic Speed Control    in    Under        operating conditions  This can cause a fire if you standing The Features Of Your Vehicle      drive slowly or park over flammable substances such   15  Cruise Speed Set Value    as dry plants  wood  cardboard  etc  This could result  in death or serious injury to the driver  occupants or   Speed value shown when set   others  16  EVIC Amber Telltale Lights  14  Electronic Speed Control Indicator Lights When the appropriate conditions exist  the following  e Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator EVIC Amber Telltale Lights will display   This light will turn on 
254. uently over his her  shoulder when using ParkView    HomeLink   replaces up to three hand held transmitters  that operate devices such as garage door openers  motor   NOTE  snow  ice  mud  or any foreign substance builds ized gates  lighting or home security systems  The  up on the camera lens  clean the lens  rinse with water  Homelink  unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt       and dry with a soft cloth  Do not cover the lens  battery   Turning ParkView  On Or Off     With The HomeLink   buttons  located on the sunvisor  desig   Touch   Screen Radio nate the three different HomeLink   channels  The    1 Tur d Radio Gn  HomeLink   indicator is located above the center button     2  Press the  More  soft key   3  Press the  Settings  soft key     NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107       033972522    HomeLink   Buttons Sunvisor  NOTE  HomeLink   is disabled when the Vehicle Secu   rity Alarm is active     Before You Begin Programming HomeLink      Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage  before you begin programming     For more efficient programming and accurate transmis   sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that  a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of  the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink    system     Erase all channels before you begin programming  To  erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN  position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink    buttons  I and III  for up 2
255. uld be made to body  sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection   This connection should not be fused     Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof  or the rear area of the vehicle  Care should be used in  mounting antennas with magnet bases  Magnets may affect  the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so  equipped     The antenna cable should be as short as practical and  routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible  Use  only fully shielded coaxial cable     Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to  ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio  SWR      Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than  normal may require special precautions     All installations should be checked for possible interfer   ence between the communications equipment and the  vehicle   s electronic systems     Chrysler Group LLC  13ZD 126 AA     SIZ T        SERVICE  STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS     li     First Edition Rev 1    Printed in U S A     
256. under the  New Vehicle Limited Warranty        232 STARTING AND OPERATING ME  GROUND CLEARANCE    The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and  ground clearance is limited     CAUTION     Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can  occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in  these areas of your vehicle  Pay close attention when    parking to avoid running into parking curbs  Exer   cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive   ways  or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul   ders           WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES                         CONTENTS   E HAZARD WARNING FLASHER             234 TIREFIT Usage Precautions                238   Bl IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS              234 Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT               240   IB TIREEIT KIT ooo ss heat se ew oe ae 235 W JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES             245  TIREFIT Storage   ice epe Re RE weal 236 W FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE                   TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation       236 Mi TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE            250       234 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  EE    HAZARD WARNING FLASHER    The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the  center of the instrument panel above the climate controls     A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning   flasher  When the switch is activated  all direc   tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming  traffic of an emergency  Press the switch a second time to  turn off the Hazard Warning flasher     This is an em
257. ur radio  This condition may be lessened or eliminated  by relocating the mobile phone antenna  This condition is  not harmful to the radio  If your radio performance does  not satisfactorily    clear    by the repositioning of the  antenna  it is recommended that the radio volume be  turned down or off during mobile phone operation when  not using Uconnect    if equipped      The hard keys located below the Uconnect   Access screen     CLIMATE CONTROLS    The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the  temperature  amount  and direction of air circulating  throughout the vehicle  The controls are located on the  instrument panel below the radio        Automatic Climate Controls     Hard keys    166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Soft Keys    Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect  Access system  screen        045671543    Uconnect   Access Temperature Controls     Soft keys    Button Descriptions  Applies To Both Hard keys And  Soft keys     1  A C Button    Press and release to change the current setting  the  indicator illuminates when A C is ON  Performing this  function again will cause the A C operation to switch  into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off     2  Recirculation Button    Press and release to change the current setting  the  indicator illuminates when ON     3  AUTO Temperature Control    Controls airflow temperature  distribution  volume  and  the amount of air recirculation automatically  Pr
258. ure of an  infant or child restraint  It could come loose in a  collision  The child could be badly injured or  killed  Follow the child restraint manufacturer   s  directions exactly when installing an infant or    child restraint      When your child restraint is not in use  secure it in  the vehicle with the seat belt or tether anchorage  or  remove it from the vehicle  Do not leave it loose in  the vehicle  In a sudden stop or accident  it could  strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious  personal injury        NEE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63    Children Too Large for Booster Seats    Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  comfortably  and whose legs are long enough to bend  over the front of the seat when their back is against the  seatback  should use the seat belt in the seat  Use this  simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the  vehicle s seat belt alone       Can the child sit all the way back against the back of  the vehicle seat     Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of  the vehicle seat   while they are still sitting all the way  back     e Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder  between their neck and arm     e     Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible  touching  the child s thighs and not their stomach       Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip     If the answer to any of these questions was    no     then the  child still needs to use a booster
259. urrent torque  will be displayed     Current Power    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until     Current Power    is highlighted in the EVIC  Press and  release the RIGHT arrow button and the current power  will be displayed     NEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149    SRT Performance Info    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow       727     button until the SRT icon is highlighted in the   EVIC  Press and release the RIGHT arrow   button and 0 60 MPH Duration will be dis   played  Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll  through the following information sub menus     Braking Distance    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the last Braking Distance information is displayed     1 8 Mile Top Speed  amp  Duration    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the last 1 8 Mile Top Speed  amp  Duration information is  displayed     Current G Forces    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the Current G Forces are displayed     Peak G Forces    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the Peak G Forces are displayed     0 60 MPH    Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until  the last 0 60 MPH information is displayed     Fuel Economy    W    Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon  MPG Bargraph     Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow  button until the Fuel Economy icon is high   lighted  Press the RIGHT arrow button and the  next screen will display the following     150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
260. use inter   nal injuries  Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder  bones  Wear the belt over your shoulder so that    e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will  not protect you properly  The lap portion could ride  too high on your body  possibly causing internal  injuries  Always buckle your belt into the buckle    nearest you      A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop   erly  In a sudden stop  you could move too far  forward  increasing the possibility of injury  Wear  your seat belt snugly     your strongest bones will take the force in a colli   sion   e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect  you from injury during a collision  You are more   Continued  likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not  wear your shoulder belt  The lap and shoulder belt  are meant to be used together        5  Position the lap belt across your thighs  below your  abdomen  To remove slack in the lap belt portion  pull  up a little on the shoulder belt  as shown     38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE    j E WARNING     e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  injury in a collision  The belt forces won t be at the  strong hip and pelvic bones  but across your abdo     men  Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as  low as possible and keep it snug      A twisted belt may not protect you properly  In a  collision  it could even cut into you  Be sure the belt  is straight  If you can t straighten a belt in your  vehicle  take it to y
261. used by the tire manufacturer  one to four digits   03   Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured  two digits               03 means the 3rd week             ee STARTING AND OPERATING 207    EXAMPLE   DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301  01   Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured  two digits                  01 means the year 2001        Prior to July 2000  tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the  year in which the tire was manufactured  Example  031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991                Tire Terminology And Definitions             Term Definition  B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located  behind the front door   Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after    the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours  or driven less  than 1 mile  1 6 km  after sitting for a three hour period  Inflation  pressure is measured in units of PSI  pounds per square inch  or  kPa  kilopascals                  208 STARTING AND OPERATING ME       Term Definition       Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible  cold tire inflation pressure for this tire  The maximum inflation  pressure is molded into the sidewall           Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer   s recommended cold tire inflation pressure  Pressure as shown on the tire placard   Tire Placard A pape
262. ust be done at the times or mileages specified fully warmed engine is shut off  Checking the oil level  to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the  vehicle performance and reliability  More frequent main  accuracy of the oil level reading  Add oil only when    tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark   conditions  such as dusty areas and very short trip  driving  Inspection and service should also be done  anytime a malfunction is suspected     e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if  required     NOTE  Under no circumstances should oil change in  Orice A Month  tervals exceed 6 000 miles  10 000 km  or six months  e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or  whichever comes first  damage     CAUTION  e Inspect the battery  and clean and tighten the terminals    as required     Failure to perform the required maintenance items  may result in damage to the vehicle        es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 301    e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir  brake  master cylinder  power steering  and transmission  and  add as needed     e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct  operation     At Each Oil Change  e Change the engine oil filter   e Inspect the exhaust system     NOTE  Also  inspect the exhaust system if you notice a  change in the sound of the exhaust system  or if the  exhaust fumes can be detected inside the 
263. uthorized Dealer                 NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293       Bulb Number    Bulb Number          gate     Courtesy Foot Well 194  Lights  Cargo Lamp  Coupe Lift  168       Exterior Bulbs       Bulb Number       Low  High Beam Head   lamp    LED  Serviced at  Authorized Dealer        Front Park Turn Signal  Lamp    LED  Serviced at  Authorized Dealer        Front Side Marker Lamp  Center High Mounted  Stop Lamp  CHMSL     Tail Stop Turn Signal  Lamp          2886X  LED  Serviced at  Authorized Dealer   LED  Serviced at  Authorized Dealer              Rear Marker Lamp 194  Backup Lamp 3157  License Lamp LED  Serviced at             Authorized Dealer        BULB REPLACEMENT   Front Headlamp  Front Park Turn Signal Lamp   For bulb replacement  see your authorized dealer    Front Rear Side Marker Lamp    1  Remove the front rear side marker  Use a fiber stick or  similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard  side to disengage the clip     294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEE  NOTE     5     e If a screwdriver is used  make sure a soft material is  placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to  scratch the paint       Rotate the bulb   s socket counterclockwise  and remove    the bulb and socket assembly from the housing       Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace     ment bulb       Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing     and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place     Reinstall the front rea
264. ve Entry equipped door handle is grasped  If 1st  Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed  only the  driver   s door will unlock when the driver   s door is  grasped  With Passive Entry  if 1st Press Of Key Fob  Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than  once will only result in the driver s door opening  If  driver door first is selected  once the driver door is  opened  the interior door lock unlock switch can be used  to unlock all doors  or use RKE transmitter         160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Engine Off Options    After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol   lowing settings will be available     e Engine Off Power Delay    When this feature is selected  the power window  switches  radio  Uconnect   phone system  if equipped    DVD video system  if equipped   power sunroof  if  equipped   and power outlets will remain active for up to  10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF  Opening  either front door will cancel this feature  To change the  Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds  45  seconds  5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key  Then touch the  arrow back soft key     e Headlight Off Delay    When this feature is selected  the driver can choose to  have the headlights remain on for 0  30  60  or 90 seconds  when exiting the vehicle  To change the Headlight Off    Delay status touch the   or   soft key to select your  desired time interval  Touch the back arrow soft key to  return to
265. vehicle       Inspect the brake hoses     e Inspect the suspension components       Lubricate door hinges and check springs    e Check the engine coolant level  hoses  and clamps   e Check power steering fluid level    Required Maintenance Intervals    Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following  pages for the required maintenance intervals        302 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se       6 000 Miles  10 000 km  or 12 000 Miles  20 000 km  or 12 Months Maintenance Service  6 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule  1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter   T Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires   filter  H Replace the air conditioning filter  if equipped    d  d       J Rotate tires  Inspect the brake linings  and replace if necessary    Inspect the exhaust system  Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles  20 000 km   or 12 months    Inspect the manual transmission fluid  add as necessary    Inspect the front suspension and tie rod ends for cracks or leaks and all parts for  damage  wear  improper looseness or end play  replace if necessary        L LU          Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date          Repair Order   Dealer Code Repair Order   Dealer Code          Signature  Authorized Service Center Signature  Authorized Service Center                NEE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 303          18 000 Miles  30 000 km  or 24 000 Miles  40 000 km  or 24 Months Maintenance Service  18 Months Maintenance Schedule  Service Schedule  1 Change 
266. vehicle   Following these few simple guidelines is all that is  necessary for a good break in     For the first 500 miles  800 km        Keep your vehicle speed below the legal  posted speed  limit and your engine speed below 4 000 RPM     e Avoid driving at a constant speed  either fast or slow   for long periods       Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full  throttle acceleration     Use the proper gear for your speed range     Wait until the engine has reached normal operating  temperature before driving at the recommended maxi   mum break in speed       Avoid excessive idling     Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill        68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEE ed    NOTE  A new engine will consume some oil during the WARNING   Continued     first few thousand miles  kilometers  of operation  This n      should be considered a normal part of the break in and     It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area     not interpreted as a sign of difficulty  inside or outside of a vehicle  In a collision  people  riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  SAFETY TIPS injured or killed     Transporting P Haers   Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  ansporting Fassenge vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat  NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO belts     AREA  e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and    using a seat belt properly   WARNING     e Do not leave children or an
267. ver  if you haven t healed significantly within a  few days  or if you have any blistering  see your doctor  immediately     e As the Air Bags deflate  you may see some smoke like  particles  The particles are a normal by product of the  process that generates the non toxic gas used for Air  Bag inflation  These airborne particles may irritate the  skin  eyes  nose  or throat  If you have skin or eye  irritation  rinse the area with cool water  For nose or    throat irritation  move to fresh air  If the irritation  continues  see your doctor  If these particles settle on  your clothing  follow the garment manufacturer s in   structions for cleaning     Do not drive your vehicle after the Air Bags have  deployed  If you are involved in another collision  the Air  Bags will not be in place to protect you     WARNING     Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not  protect you in another collision  Have the air bags     seat belt pretensioners  and the front seat belt retrac   tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im   mediately  Also  have the Occupant Restraint Con   troller  ORC  system serviced as well        58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    Maintaining Your Air Bag System    WARNING       Modifications to any part of the air bag system  could cause it to fail when you need it  You could  be injured if the air bag system is not there to  protect you  Do not modify the components or  wiring  including addi
268. w Defroster        ee ee ee ee ee 121  Rear Window Features        ee ee ee ee ee ee 121  Reclining Front Seats  ies ages o i uh meus 82  Recorder  Event Data           0 00 0 000 00 eee 59  Recreational Towing      EE EES EE trenbi dak 231  Reformulated Gasoline        taca aa EE ee ee 225  Refrigerant   icio sg bu Ead dos rela REK d ta 264  Reminder  Lights On       0 6 20    0002 ee eae 90  Reminder  Seat Belt             0 00002 eee eae 40  Remote Keyless Entry  RKE                    20  Remote Sound System  Radio  Controls           164  Replacement Keys           llle 16  Replacement Parts        llle 256  Replacement Tires    2 6    0  Ee EE EE es  219  Reporting Safety Defects        ee ee ee ee ee 322  Restraints Child  ss soes ee ek cee ER Red 60  Restraints  Infant       SS SE SS SS SE Se tran 61  Restraints  Occupant  ss Ese edie e em ER 33    Rocking Vehicle When Stuck    Rotation  Tires  ii EER ER 0 0802 25504404045 221  Safety Checks Inside Vehicle                0   69  Safety Checks Outside Vehicle             iilis  70  Safety Defects  Reporting s setes sasae tensie 322  Safety  Exhaust Gas    is nick ote nar atapa oen 32  Safety Information  Tire           llle 202  Safety PS  2 454 ki Sd dates EN eet oti 68  Schedule  Maintenance              0 00000 300  Seat Belt Maintenance                0 000  282  Seat Belt Reminder                000000004 40  Seat Belts    sk a ce BERE DAE ER DER RR HE Rg 33  And Pregnant WOMEN    casana EE seraa tawi 42  Child Re
269. when the electronic speed e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator     If    O control is ON  For further information  refer to Equipped     Electronic Speed Control    in    Understanding eS This light will turn on to indicate the wind   The Features Of Your Vehicle   shield washer fluid is low    134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL    e Low Fuel Light  When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal  a  11 0 L  this light will turn on  and remain on until  fuel is added   17  EVIC Red Telltale Lights    When the appropriate conditions exist  the following  EVIC Red Telltale Lights will display   e Engine Temperature  This telltale warns of an overheated engine con   Z  dition  As temperatures rise and the gauge ap   proaches H  or 260  F  this telltale will illuminate  and a single chime will sound after reaching a set  threshold  Further overheating will cause the tempera   ture gauge to pass H  or 260  F  a continuous chime will  occur until the engine is allowed to cool     If the telltale turns on while driving  safely pull over and  stop the vehicle  If the A C system is on  turn it off  Also        shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve   hicle  If the temperature reading does not return to  normal  turn the engine off immediately and call for  service  Refer to    If Your Engine Overheats    in    What To  Do In Emergencies    for more information   e Charging System   This telltale shows the status of the electrical  charging system  If the telltal
270. wing settings  will be available     e BalancelFade    When in this display you may adjust the Balance and  Fade settings     162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ed    e Equalizer    When in this display you may adjust the Bass  Mid and  Treble settings  Adjust the settings with the   and     setting  soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the    and   soft keys  Then touch the arrow back soft key     NOTE  Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your  finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch  directly on the desired setting     e Speed Adjusted Volume    This feature increases or decreases volume relative to  vehicle speed  To change the Speed Adjusted Volume  touch the Off  1  2 or 3 soft key  Then touch the arrow  back soft key    e Surround Sound   This feature provides simulated surround sound mode   To make your selection  touch the Surround Sound    soft key  select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow  back soft key     Phone Bluetooth    After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow   ing settings will be available     e Paired Devices    This feature shows which phones are paired to the  Phone Bluetooth system  For further information  refer  to the Uconnect   Access User   s Manual     SiriusXM Setup    After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following  settings will be available     e Channel Skip    SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of  channels that are the 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Optimus SYSTEM 734 Home Theater System User Manual  invertidor multi-tipo manual de instalación para uso del personal  取扱説明書 - 三菱電機  benutzerhandbuch rma-power-box 108  3M X90w User's Manual  Samsung ARK-A10N User Manual  HP 002-01A Warranty and Support Guide  Professional LED Video Monitor User`s Manual  03790204 - Zanzini Móveis  Notice    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file